JP6427537B2 - Pachinko gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  It is about a pachinko game machine.

  The pachinko game machine that is most widely spread at present is called "special symbol" (or main game symbol) on the display unit such as 7-segment when the game ball enters the start opening (start chucker). Symbol is variably displayed, and when the special symbol is in a specific mode (for example, “7”), the special gaming state in which the player has a higher profit state than the normal gaming state {the special winning opening in the closed state at the normal time It is a model of a type (so-called "first-class pachinko gaming machine") that shifts to a game of contents opened by a predetermined condition (a so-called attacker). Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of the special symbol directly linked to the player's profit, it is called "decorative symbol" for effect to enhance the interest of the game separately from the "special symbol" described above. The symbol to be displayed is displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in synchronization with the variation of the special symbol. Then, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also begins to change accordingly, and when the special symbol is stopped in a specific mode (for example, "7"), the decorative symbol is also according to this, a predetermined mode (for example, It will stop at "777". Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game is determined by the decorative symbol being stopped in a predetermined manner.

  Here, since the mechanism is common to this type of pachinko gaming machine, how to devise a high level of interest with regard to overall production including the variation pattern of the above-mentioned pattern, in order to differentiate from other types. It is focused on whether to grant. For example, effects such as displaying two "decorative symbols" that are variably displayed at the same time, or hiding a "decorative symbol" that is variably displayed, instead displaying a highly interesting moving image One method is to improve the interest of the game by the method.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-312674 JP 2011-45518 A JP 2014-014494 JP 2014-014576

  However, since such a rendering method has been widely used conventionally, there is a problem that the control method needs to be further improved in order to improve the interest.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A first starting opening disposed at a position where entering the ball is easier than the gaming ball flowing down the second area side, the gaming ball flowing down the first area side,
A second starting opening disposed at a position where the game ball flowing down the second area side can enter the balls;
Variable winning opening that can take open and closed states,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect;
With the sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
Equipped with
The main game club is
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first starting opening;
First random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as a first hold until the first random number acquisition means acquires the first random number, until the first success or failure determination permission condition is satisfied;
If the first pass / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the pass / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the pass / fail judgment First game content determination means for determining the variation display mode of the first identification information;
First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second starting opening;
Second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as a second hold until the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, until the second yes / no determination permission condition is satisfied;
If the second yes / no decision permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a yes / no decision is performed on the basis of the second random number according to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information Second game content determination means for determining the variation display mode of the second identification information;
Second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the pass / fail judgment based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the pass / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed Special game control means capable of executing a special game which can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player;
As a gaming state during non-execution of the special game, there is a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state where it is easier to enter the second starting opening than the normal gaming state, and after the execution of the special game is over the specific gaming state Game state transition control means that can be controlled
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the secondary gaming unit to the side of the secondary gaming unit
The first identification information is not displayed while the second identification information is not displayed while the first identification information is displayed in a variable state. ,
The secondary gaming unit is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit side;
Effect display content control means for controlling the effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
First effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display portion after the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display portion;
Second effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit
Equipped with
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or in the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to display variable for the first effect and the second effect Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variation display mode, a variation display of a first effect design corresponding to the certain variation display mode and a second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode Is configured to be able to execute variable
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variation display mode, the variation display of the first effect design corresponding to the certain variation display mode and the second effect design corresponding to the certain variation display mode Is configured to be able to execute variable
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the symbol,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the symbol,
A launch notification effect can be displayed on the effect display unit to notify the second area to prompt the game ball to be launched, and the launch notification effect is not displayed under the normal gaming state, but the launch notification effect is Is configured to be able to be displayed under circumstances where it is in a specific gaming state,
It is possible to simultaneously display all of the symbol for the first effect, the symbol for the second effect, and the emission notification effect,
A specific preview effect can be displayed on the effect display unit,
In the effect display unit, the emission notification effect is displayed at a position where it can overlap with the first effect design in the variable display, and the specific advance notice effect overlaps with the first effect design in the variable display. It is configured to be displayed at the obtained position,
In the effect display unit, the emission notification effect is displayed at a position not overlapping with the second effect design in the change display, while the specific advance notice effect overlaps with the second effect design in the change display. It is configured to be displayed at the obtained position,
It is possible to display the number of first holding images corresponding to the number of remaining first holdings in the first holding image display area in the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings in the second holding image display area in the effect display unit,
The first hold number, which is the remaining hold number of the first hold, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit,
The second hold number, which is the remaining hold number of the second hold, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit,
A plurality of effect display formats are provided, and any one of the plurality of effect display formats can be displayed by the effect display unit, and when the effect display content is displayed, the effect display format is displayed. Are configured to be able to display
When the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first reserved image is displayed in the first reserved image display area, but of the plurality of types of effect display formats When the second effect display format is displayed, while the first hold image is not displayed, the plurality of effect displays even if the first effect display format of the plurality of effect display formats is displayed. Even if the second effect display format of the format is displayed, the first number of reservations is displayed in the first number of reservations display area
A pachinko gaming machine characterized by
<Supplementary Note>
In addition, although listed about another aspect different from this aspect below, it is possible to implement without being limited to these at all.
Pachinko gaming machine according to the present alternative embodiment,
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
First game content determination means (for example, game content) which determines the stop display mode of the first identification information and the variation display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the success / failure determination. Decision means MN),
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
Second game content determination means (for example, game content) which executes a yes-no decision based on the second random number and determines the stop display mode of the second identification information and the variation display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the yes-no decision Decision means MN),
The second identification information is controlled to be stopped after the second identification information is variably displayed in the second identification information display unit according to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the result of the pass / fail judgment based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the pass / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed , And special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game which can make a variable winning hole (for example, the first large winning hole C10 and the second large winning hole C20) advantageous for the player ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
While the first identification information is variably displayed, the second identification information is not variably displayed, and while the second identification information is variably displayed, the first identification information is not variably displayed.
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
After the symbol for the first effect is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the final display mode of the symbol for the first effect is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) First effect design symbol display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling to
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (eg, effect display device SG), the final display mode of the second effect symbol is displayed on the effect display unit (eg, effect display device SG) And a second effect symbol display control unit (for example, a decorative symbol display control unit SM21) for controlling to
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or in the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to display variable for the first effect and the second effect Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variation display mode, a variation display of a first effect design corresponding to the certain variation display mode and a second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode Is configured to be able to execute variable
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variation display mode, the variation display of the first effect design corresponding to the certain variation display mode and the second effect design corresponding to the certain variation display mode Is configured to be able to execute variable
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the symbol,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the symbol,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is within one production period,
With regard to the first effect design that is variably displayed in a certain effect period, a provisional display mode may be displayed before the final display mode is displayed in the certain effect period, and the provisional display When a mode is displayed, it is possible to execute the pseudo-variation that is displayed again in a variable manner within the certain one rendering period, and when the temporary display mode of the first rendering symbol is displayed, the first rendering It is configured to be able to display a special display mode that is not displayed as a final display mode of a symbol,
With regard to the second effect design that is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the special display mode is configured not to be displayed within the one effect period,
When the result of the success or failure judgment is won and the first identification information or the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final mode of the first effect design is a plurality of types while the second mode The final display mode of the design symbol for effect is configured to be only one type, or the number of types of final display mode of the symbol for second effect is less than the number of types of final display mode of the symbol for first effect It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being configured.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present aspect, it is possible to improve the control method related to the effect relating to the decorative symbol.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flow chart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the motorized product drive determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of main gaming symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of hold information management processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is an example of a decorative symbol presentation table on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is an example of a decorative symbol presentation table on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the first decorative symbol display control process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a second decorative symbol display control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of background rendering control processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27: is an example of the decoration symbol presentation table in the submain control part side in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the example 1 of a change from this embodiment. FIG. 28: is an example of the decoration symbol presentation table in the submain control part side in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the example 1 of a change from this embodiment. FIG. 29: is an example of the decoration symbol presentation table in the submain control part side in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the example 2 of a change from this embodiment. FIG. 30: is an example of the decoration symbol presentation table in the submain control part side in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the example 2 of a change from this embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flow chart of the drawing stop symbol determination on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a display mode image diagram of a decorative symbol on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 34: is an example of the decoration symbol presentation table in the submain control part side in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the example 3 of change from this embodiment. FIG. 35: is an example of the decoration symbol presentation table in the submain control part side in the pachinko game machine which concerns on the example 3 of a change from this embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of a first decorative symbol display control process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram related to the configuration of the effect display device in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is a transmission effect execution image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a main flowchart of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of hold information management processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flow chart of first main game winning combination prefetching determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is a flowchart of second main game winning combination prefetch determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of prefetch hold content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of decorative symbol reserve content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flow chart of advance notice / drawing stop symbol determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flow chart of a process of determining a first main game advance notice and dressing stop symbol on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second variation from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flow chart of second main game advance notice effect / drawing stopping symbol determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flow chart of first main game winning combination prefetch determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of hold-on mode change control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 60 is a holding change conceptual diagram in the specific advance notice at the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of a hold and digest transfer image display process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 62 is an image diagram showing a change in the image of the reserve digest transmission on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 63 is a flowchart of background rendering control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment. FIG. 64 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 65 is a table configuration diagram used in first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 66 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 67 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 68 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of distribution game execution processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 71 is a main flowchart of the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flow chart of a process of determining first drawing content in the time control system at the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 74 is a flowchart of an embellishment symbol display control process in the hour and day on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 75 is a main flowchart of the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 76 is a flowchart of right-handed instruction display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 77 is an image diagram concerning a display mode and a display position of a decorative symbol in a pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 78 is an image diagram concerning a display area of a decorative symbol in a pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 79 is an image diagram according to the variation display period of the decorative symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 80 is an image diagram of a decorative symbol to be used in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 81 is an image diagram according to the stop display mode of the decorative symbol in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 82 shows an example of display priority in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 83 is an image diagram concerning priority in a pachinko gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a main flow chart on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of a decorative symbol display control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 87 is an image diagram according to a change of the hold display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 88 is an image diagram according to a suspension display for each gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 89 is an image diagram according to the deletion of the hold display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment. FIG. 90 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. 91 is an operation diagram of the distribution member unit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 92 is a flowchart of main gaming symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 93 is a flowchart of a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 94 is a table configuration diagram used in first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 95 is a table configuration diagram used in a first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a main flowchart of the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart of symbol standby display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a decorative symbol display mode image view in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 99 is a flowchart of hold information management processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 100 is a flowchart of hold change display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 101 is a holding occurrence display image view in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 102 is an image view of a reserve digest display in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 103 is a holding passage route image view in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 104 is a flow chart of first main game winning combination prefetching determination processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a flowchart of second main game winning combination prefetching determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 108 is a first decorative symbol performance content determination table on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 109 is a second decorative symbol presentation content determination table on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 110 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 111 is a flowchart of pre-reading display control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 112 is a flowchart of a first decorative symbol display control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 113 is a flowchart of a second decorative symbol display control process on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 114 is a jackpot stop symbol display image view in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 115 is a flowchart of a main region interrupt process B on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 116 is an interrupt production execution image diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 117 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing C on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 118 is a flowchart of background effect control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 119 is a flowchart of bonus drive control processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 120 is a flowchart of decorative symbol content determination processing on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 121 is a first decorative symbol performance content determination table on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 122 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing A on the sub main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a flowchart of a first decorative symbol display control process on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first variation from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 124 is a flowchart of main area interrupt processing B on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 125 is a flowchart of a main region interrupt process C on the side of the sub main control unit in the pachinko gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in the present specification will be described. The term "entry" includes not only winnings where the winning balls are paid out, but also passing to "through chuckers" where there is no winning balls paid out. The "opened state, open state" and "closed state, closed state" are, for example, open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = no prize in the configuration of a general large winning opening (so-called, attacker). It will be easy. Also, for example, a state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an advanced state) projected from the game board (the player side) and a state (hereinafter referred to as the retracted state) retracted into the game board (opposite to the player side) In a configuration (so-called Vero type attacker) capable of taking the above condition, the advancing state = the winning easy state, and the retreating state = the winning non-easiness state. The "random number" is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) for determining some game content in a pachinko gaming machine, and includes pseudo random numbers in addition to narrow random numbers (for example, hard as random numbers Random number, soft random number as pseudo random number). For example, the so-called "basic random number" affecting the outcome of the game, specifically, "winning random number (random number for winning lottery)" associated with the transition of the special game, the variation pattern (or variation time) of the identification symbol is determined "Variation mode decision random number" for doing, "symbol decision random number" which decides stop pattern, and "per hit symbol decision random number" which decides whether or not to shift to specific game (for example probability fluctuation game) after special game be able to. When determining the content of the variation mode or the content of the fixed identification information, it is not necessary to use all these random numbers, and at least one random number which is the same as or different from each other may be used. In addition, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but once in the entrance (for example, starting entrance) which is a trigger for acquiring random numbers. The random number acquired by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, a bundle of random numbers such as a winning random number + a variation mode determination random number + a symbol determination random number ... is referred to as a single random number) . Also, for example, one type of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also be another type of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). The “gaming state” is, for example, a special gaming state in which the special winning opening can be opened, a transition to the special gaming state, a transition to the special gaming state from a non-probability fluctuation gaming state where the lottery probability is a predetermined value. Transition game state with high lottery probability, transition to special game Auxiliary game state with assistance for winning to start slot that becomes transition lottery to special game (so-called, normal symbol time reduction state, for example, variable members are attached to the start slot In the case, the open period of the variable member is long, the open winning probability of the variable member is high, the notification time of the result of the open lottery of the variable member is short, and so on. The “design for effect” is a display image of a kind called a so-called decorative symbol or decorative symbol, and typically, figures, symbols and the like are described in an image object such as a card type. Then, the image object is finally stopped and displayed on the effective line in a combination where the numbers and symbols become the same, thereby notifying that the big hit has occurred. Both the “first effect design” and the “second effect design” are those for which “the effect design” is used, but each is configured to be able to report the occurrence of a big hit independently of each other. (For example, "the first design symbol" is "777" and it is also possible to report the occurrence of the big hit, "the second design symbol" is "777" and it is possible to report the occurrence of the big hit) ) The phrase "provisionally stop (or temporarily stop) a design for effect" is equivalent to "perform temporary stop → re-variate" as one set and to perform / do not perform this one set. is there. Moreover, it is also synonymous with excluding the final stop display timing (typically, it will be stop-displayed together with the so-called stop display of a special symbol after that) which alert | reports generation | occurrence | production presence or absence of big hit. In addition, "design for effect" is based on the first element (for example, numbers), and the second element (for example, color) or the third element (for the presence or absence of a character or incidental information such as "SUPER") It may be configured to accompany. In addition, the “design for effect” may be configured such that the second element and / or the third element are different even if the first element is the same when the effect mode is different. In addition, the second element and / or the third element is different, the expectation that the reach fluctuation is a big hit, the expectation that it is a big hit by the symbol fluctuation related to the prefetch effect when the specific symbol combination stop at the time of prefetch effect execution The rate of profit for the player such as the number of rounds at the time of the big hit and the gaming state after the big hit may be configured to be different. Also, when configured as such, in the case of probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening gaming state, etc., the second element and / or the third element is the player compared to the case of normal gaming state. It may be configured to be an advantageous factor for The "information display unit" is to display information including notice effects and the like, and is, for example, a effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and each of these may be shown alone. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of display media (whole unit) such as effect display device + 7 segment LED + LED lamp may be shown. In addition, “the effect display unit” is to display effects including a notice effect etc., and is, for example, a effect display device, a 7-segment LED, an LED lamp, etc., and each of these may be shown alone Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of display media (whole unit) such as effect display device + 7 segment LED + LED lamp may be shown.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 first type compound machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is within the scope when applied to other gaming machines (eg, conventional pachinko gaming machines such as conventional type 1, type 2, type 3 and general electronic combination). . Note that the present embodiment is merely an example, and relates to the order of each step regarding various processes such as the location and function of each means, the on / off timing of the flag, and the means name etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the embodiments and modifications described above should not be construed as limiting as applied to specific ones, and may be any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification of one embodiment is a modification of another embodiment, and even if one modification and another modification are independently described, It should be understood that a combination of the modification and the other modification is also described. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table regarding various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa.

  Prior to the detailed description of the present invention, a brief configuration according to the present invention will now be described.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, two kinds of a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol are provided as a decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed or hardly visible in the second decorative symbol. A configuration that displays (variation display) a symbol will be described in detail in (this embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (this embodiment), a special symbol and a specific result (a product consisting only of numbers) are generated at the temporary stop timing of the middle row at the time of execution of pseudo continuous variation The configuration changed so as to be able to temporarily stop will be described in detail in (Modification 1 of this embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (the present embodiment), the temporary stop timing is later in the second half at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous change {or The configuration in which the number of stoppages that can be temporarily stopped increases as (the number of times of temporary stop in the middle row) increases, will be described in detail in (Modification 2 of this embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, the display region SG10 of the effect display device SG is in the transmission state, and it is possible to execute a transmission effect in which features in the effect display device SG can be viewed. The configuration in which the effect display in the second decorative symbol display device is executed even if the first decorative symbol is not displayed will be described in detail in (Modification 3 of the present embodiment).

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention has a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol as a decorative symbol, and is configured to be able to execute pre-reading effect, and the special symbol is a final variation of pre-reading effect A configuration that can be stopped as a fixed stop symbol of fluctuation according to (1) and can be stopped as a pseudo continuous symbol of pseudo continuous variation will be described in detail in the second embodiment.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, change from the configuration of (the second embodiment) to a specific hold display mode at the time of execution of the hold change effect (effect that the hold display mode changes) The configuration changed to provide a notice effect to be executed only when the above is performed will be described in detail in (Modification 1 from the second embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, from the configuration of (the second embodiment), the appearance rate of the special symbol by the fluctuation of the first main game side and the fluctuation of the second main game side (prefetched lottery winning rate and angel zone A configuration in which the transition lottery winning rate is changed to be different will be described in detail in (Modification 2 from the second embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, in the time-saving gaming state, one fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol can be a time value for a plurality of fluctuation time of the second decorative symbol (or the main gaming symbol) This configuration will be described in detail in the (third embodiment).

  Various configurations regarding the display mode, display position, display area, priority, and the like of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol applicable to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail in the fourth embodiment. explain.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention, the effect display device displays a display corresponding to two reservations of the first suspension display and the second suspension display (Modification example 1 from the fourth embodiment This will be described in detail.

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, it is possible to execute a parallel lottery, and a decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the first main gaming symbol is a first decorative symbol, and a decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the second main gaming symbol is the first The structure which makes it 2 decoration patterns is demonstrated in detail by (5th Embodiment).

  Among the pachinko gaming machines according to the present invention, the configuration in which the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed is modified from the configuration of the fifth embodiment (change from the fifth embodiment) This will be described in detail in Example 1).

(This embodiment)

  Here, before describing each component, the features (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines are mainly composed of gaming machine slots and gaming boards. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper bowl D20, a lower bowl D22, and a firing handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine at a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame aligned with the opening of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 so as to be able to open and close via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for firing a game ball, a mechanism for detachably accommodating a game board, a mechanism for guiding or recovering the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is formed of glass or the like and is supported by the door D18. The door D18 is openably and closably attached to the front frame D14 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball dish D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending out the game balls to the launch rail, and removing the game balls from the lower ball dish D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and removing game balls. In addition, speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the gaming machine, and sound effects are output according to the gaming state and the like.

  Next, in the game board, a game area D30 partitioned by the outer rail D32 and the inner rail D34 is formed. Then, in the game area D30, in addition to a plurality of mechanisms such as a plurality of game nails and windmills not shown and various general winning openings, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10, an auxiliary game start opening H10, 1st large winning opening C10, 2nd large winning opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, effect display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail in order.

  Next, the first main game start port A10 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start port A10 is provided with a first main game start port entering ball detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start slot entrance ball detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the first main game start slot A10, and the first main game start indicating the entrance ball at the time of entry Generate ball entry information.

  Next, the second main game start port B10 is installed as a start winning port corresponding to the second main game. As a specific configuration, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port ball detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric role object B11d. Here, the second main game start slot entrance ball detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the second main game start slot B10, and indicates the second main game start indicating the entrance ball at the time of entry. Generate ball entry information. Next, the second main game start port electric role B11d changes into a closed state in which the game ball is less likely to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is easier to win than the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 are arranged to overlap, and the presence of the first main game start opening A10 makes the second main game start. The upper part of the game start port B10 is closed. In addition, both the game ball flowing down the left side (based on the center of the game area) of the game area D30 and the game ball flowing down the right side (based on the center of the game area D30) are the first main game start opening A10. And it is comprised so that it may be induced | guided | derived to 2nd main game starting opening B10.

  In the present embodiment, although the electric bonus is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric bonus is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start opening A10 and the second main game start opening B10 are disposed to overlap vertically, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first main game start opening You may be comprised so that A10 and 2nd main game starting opening B10 may be spaced apart and arrange | positioned. In such a configuration, a member that blocks the upper portion of the second main game start opening electric combination B11 d may be provided. Also, while the game ball flowing down the left side (based on the middle of the game area) of the game area D30 is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, it is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10, and the game area D30 is The game ball flowing down the right side (based on the middle of the game area) may be configured to be easily guided to the second main game start opening B10 while being hard to be guided to the first main game start opening A10. In addition, "it is easy to be induced" and "it is hard to be induced" are determined by the size of the number of balls when 10000 balls are respectively emitted to the right and left sides of the game ball, for example.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start slot entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of the game ball to the auxiliary game start slot H10, and generates the auxiliary game start slot entrance information indicating the ball entry when entering the ball. Do. It should be noted that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 is a trigger for a lottery for expanding the second main game start port electric winning combination B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game ball that flows down the right side (the center of the game area) of the game area D30 is easily induced in the auxiliary game start port H10, and the game ball that flows down the left side of the game area D30 is Although it is configured to be hard to be induced {but not limited to this, the configuration is such that gaming balls flowing down the left side (based on the middle of the gaming region) of the gaming region D30 are easily guided to the auxiliary gaming start port H10 (For example, the auxiliary game start port H10 may be provided on the left and right sides of the game area D30)}.

  Next, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 are disposed in the upper right of the out port D36 so as to overlap with each other, and flow down the right side (based on the center of the gaming area) of the gaming area D30. The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out slot D36.

  Next, the first large winning opening C10 forms a horizontal rectangular shape that opens when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. A winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the out opening D36 and below the second large winning opening C20. Specifically, the first large winning opening C10 is a first large winning opening winning detection device C11s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the first large winning opening electric combination C11d (and the first large winning). And a mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first large winning opening winning combination detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening C10, and the first large winning opening entering ball information indicating the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The first big winning opening electric winning combination C11d changes the first big winning opening C10 to the first big winning opening C10 in the normal state where the gaming ball can not win or difficult to win and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win (first (1) The large winning opening solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the form of the big winning opening is changed to a horizontal rectangular shape and the gaming ball can not be won or difficult to win in a normal state and an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode capable of taking an advanced state in which the rod-like member provided in the big winning opening protrudes to the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted to the player side (so-called (Velo type attacker), which is preferable when it is desired to secure that the number of balls entering the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second large winning opening C20 forms a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main gaming symbol (special symbol) or the second main gaming symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. A winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located on the upper right of the opening D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. As a specific configuration, the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s for detecting the entry of the game ball, and the second large winning opening electric combination C21d (and the second large winning And a mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second large winning opening winning combination detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entering of the gaming ball to the second large winning opening C20, the second large winning opening entering ball information showing the entering at the time of entering the ball Generate The gaming ball having entered the second large winning opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s. Next, the second big winning opening electric winning combination C21d, in the second big winning opening C20 the game ball can not be winning or difficult to win the normal state and the opening state where the gaming ball is easy to win the second big winning opening C20 Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the form of the big winning opening is changed to a horizontal rectangular shape and the gaming ball can not be won or difficult to win in a normal state and an open state in which the gaming ball can easily win. It is not limited to In that case, for example, a mode capable of taking an advanced state in which the rod-like member provided in the big winning opening protrudes to the player side and a retracted state in which the bar member is retracted to the player side (so-called (Velo type attacker), which is preferable when it is desired to secure that the number of balls entering the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (the second main game) Is an apparatus that executes the displayed information. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20), the first main game symbol display portion A21g (the second main game symbol display portion B21g), and the first main game And a symbol hold display unit A21 h (a second main game symbol hold display unit B21 h). Here, the first main game symbol holding display area A21h (the second main game symbol holding display area B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game) Corresponds to the number of pending random numbers (the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol not being executed). In addition, 1st main game symbol display part A21g (2nd main game symbol display part B21g) is comprised by 7 segment LED, for example, and 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) is "0"-"9. "10" numbers displayed with "" and lost "-" {However, not limited to this, 7-segment LED is used to make it difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the number of reservations is not limited to four lamps, and the maximum number of reservations can be displayed (for example, one lamp can be displayed. Number 1: lighted, pending number 2: low-speed blinking, pending number 3: medium-speed blinking, pending number 4: high-speed blinking, if configured).

  In the present embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (the second main game symbol display device B20), because the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) does not have to have a dramatic role. The size of is set so as not to be noticeable. However, a method is adopted in which the first main game symbol (the second main game symbol) itself has an effective role, and the first main game side decoration symbol (the second main game side decoration symbol) is not displayed. In this case, the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display such as the effect display device SG described later.

  Next, the effect display device SG executes display etc. of the effect image including the decorative pattern (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) which is changed / stopped in conjunction with the first main game pattern / the second main game pattern Device. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 in which the effect is executed including the change display of the decorative symbol and the like. Here, the display area SG10 is a first hold display unit SG12 (and a second hold display unit SG13) for displaying main game hold information, and a plurality of decorative symbols (first decoration) imitating a game of a slot machine, for example And a second display pattern SG11 for displaying a moving image of variation). In the present embodiment, the effect display device SG is configured by a liquid crystal display, but may be configured by other display means such as a mechanical drum or an LED. Next, the first hold display unit SG12 (and the second hold display unit SG13) is composed of four lamps, which are linked to the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary gaming symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display and the like regarding the auxiliary gaming symbol. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h. Here, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding display unit H21 h is configured of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of holdings of the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation (the number of auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a channel of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in an area other than the game area D30 or the game area D30, and plays an effect by blinking or the like.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko game machine controls the entire operation of the pachinko game machine, and in particular, controls the entire game operation such as lottery when entering the first main game start port A10 (second main game start port B10) (ie, the game Control board M that performs control directly related to the benefit of the person and effect control means (sub main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content SM, sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs effect display, prize ball tank KT, prize ball rail KR, and game balls supplied from the prize ball tank KT according to the winning on each winning hole D20 A prize ball payout device (set base) KE provided with a payout unit KE10 or the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (storage ball) of the upper bowl D20 To area D30 Launch device D42 that launches each ball, launch control board D40 that controls the launch operation of launcher D42, power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko game machine, and power on / off pachinko game machine A power switch Ea or the like which is a switch is provided on the back of the front frame D14 (opposite to the game side).

  Next, the electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, the payout of gaming balls is performed based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. On the effect display device SG such as fluctuation, stop, etc. of a decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the award ball payout control substrate KH to be controlled and the main control substrate M Sub-control board S that controls execution of various effects in the game, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification and the like (in this example, one sub-main control unit SM and one sub-sub control unit SS) And a power supply unit E for supplying power to the entire gaming machine including these control boards. Here, the sub control board S is various effects on the effect display device SG such as fluctuation, stop, etc. of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the sound from the speaker D24, the lighting of the game effect lamp D26 , Sub main control unit SM which controls error notification, and display processing such as variable display / stop display and hold display of preliminary design and display of decoration symbols (first and second decorative symbols) on effect display device SG There are two control units of the sub-sub control unit SS to be executed. The main control board M, the prize ball payout control board KH, the sub main control unit SM, and the sub sub control unit SS include a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing, a ROM that pre-stores a program that defines the arithmetic processing of the CPU, A RAM for temporarily storing data (such as various data generated during a game and a computer program read from a ROM) handled by the computer is mounted. Here, although not particularly illustrated, in the ROM mounted on the main control board M, in order to prevent writing of a program or the like modified due to a fraudulent action, it is configured not to provide an unused area. It is preferable (for example, filling unused areas with all 0's, filling used areas at a young address, etc.). Also, in order to prevent reference to data that is not normally referred to due to noise or fraud, unused data (for example, data used in gaming machines with different specifications or used only for testing at the development stage) It is preferable to configure so as not to provide Similarly, when using the area of the RAM, it is preferable that the area is used by filling the area at a young address and that an unused program area is not provided. The outline configuration of each substrate and the electrical connection between each substrate and device will be outlined below.

  First, the main control board M, the winning opening sensor Ns {the aforementioned first main game start opening ball insertion detection device A11s, the second main game start opening ball insertion detection device B11s, auxiliary game start opening ball insertion detection device H11s, the first 1 large winning opening winning detection device C11s, the second large winning opening winning detection device C21s, a general winning detection device (not shown, but with a general ball entry, there is a winning ball, but not a lottery for entering a symbol) ), Drive solenoids (not shown, such as the first big winning opening solenoid C13, the second big winning opening solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to the device and controls the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Furthermore, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the winning ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub main control unit SM and sub sub control unit SS), and based on the game progress, the prize balls are paid out. The information (commands) relating to etc. is configured to be able to be transmitted to the winning ball payout control board KH, and the information (commands) relating to the presentation / playing state of the game etc to the sub control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like through an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected by wiring with the hall computer HC through the external connection terminal. Is configured to output game related information to an external device.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the prize ball payout control board KH are configured to enable two-way communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to enable one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub main control unit SM (the communication method may use either serial communication or parallel communication). Communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout device KE that executes payout of game balls and a device that can be operated by a player, and receives a request for lending of game balls and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to the game ball lending device R to be transmitted. Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launcher is additionally provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launcher (launch handle, launch motor, ball feed device) Etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is adopted separately as a form adjacent to the game machine, but may be integrated with the game machine, in which case, it is rented by the prize ball payout control board KH. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, the sub control board S, as described above, the effect display device SG for displaying the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other effects It is connected to a drive unit (not shown). In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are provided in the sub control substrate S, and the control of sound to be output from the speaker D24 by the sub main control unit SM Lighting control of the lamp D26 and determination control of display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS Is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub main control unit SM and the sub sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated by the sub control substrate S, but the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate substrate Although it may be possible, a merit of being able to reduce the situation where noise mixes in space merit, wiring, etc. arises by being configured to be integrated. Further, the work assignment in both control units can be appropriately changed, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable in the case where a voice control circuit is integrated with VDP is adopted). Also, electronic value may be given without giving a physical award ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to a game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), The sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) involved in the effect, a prize ball payout control board KH performing payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M, and information communicably connected ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps) and the speakers D24. It is connected. Furthermore, the prize ball payout control substrate KH is electrically connected to a prize ball dispenser KE provided with a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM), sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in terms of hardware. And ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. The respective units included in the main control board M below may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. Hereinafter, the details of each means (apparatus) will be described.

  First, the main control board M is a game information control means MJ for controlling acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the contents of the game, and the progress of a game such as a special game or a specific game. Game progress means MP in charge of the current and past gaming state [eg, main gaming related state {normal gaming state, specific gaming state (probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening gaming state), special gaming state}, status related to auxiliary gaming (Easy open state, non easy open state), stop symbol and fluctuation mode information related to the main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol, on / off status of various flags, gaming state during special game (for example, round number and winning number information) Game status temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing etc., and various game information {for example, stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {for example, 16R big hit, 8R big hit, 4 on the gaming peripheral device side Information transmission control means MT (and unsent command is stored to transmit information relating to the big hit, loss}, fluctuation mode (eg, fluctuation time), special game start signal / state information / end signal, hold information etc.) Buffer for command transmission buffer MT10, and a prize ball payout determination means MH for controlling a prize ball payout control board KH to pay out a predetermined prize ball based on the winning of the gaming ball to various winning openings There is.

  Here, the game information control means MJ determines the ball entry determination means MJ 10 for determining the inflow of the game ball to each ball entry port (starting port etc.), and determines whether or not each random number can be acquired. The random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 20 for acquiring the respective random numbers based on the above, and the holding control means MJ 30 for temporarily storing the ball entering each starting opening during the variable display as the holding ball within the upper limit number. doing. In addition, the game progress means MP, directly to the open and close decision of the display control means MP10 for performing control to display the fluctuation and stop display of each symbol, and the second main game start opening electric role object B11d of the second main game start opening B10 The second main game start opening electric role opening and closing control means MP20-B for performing various processing related, special game control means MP30 to control the special game advantageous to the player than the normal game, and the first main With regard to the game and the second main game and the auxiliary game, there is a determination of which gaming state to shift the current gaming state, and a specific game control means MP50 for performing processing to shift the gaming state based on the determination doing. Each means will be described in detail below.

  First, the ball entry determination means MJ10 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the first main game start slot A10. The first main game start slot entry ball determination means MJ11-A and the second main game start slot The second main game start slot entrance ball determining means MJ11-B to determine whether the game ball has entered the ball B10, and the auxiliary game start slot to determine whether the game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start slot H10 In the first large winning opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10, and the second large winning opening C20, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first large winning opening C10. It has 2nd big winning a prize entrance ball determination means MJ11-C20 which determines whether a game ball entered a ball.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the entry of the game ball to the first main game start opening A10, and according to the determination result To the first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A which acquires a random number (for example, the first winning random number, the first variation mode determination random number, the first main game symbol determination random number, etc.) and the second main game start opening B10 It is determined whether to acquire the second main game random number based on the entry of the game ball, and the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determination random number, the second main according to the determination result The second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B to acquire the game pattern determination random number etc.), and whether to acquire the auxiliary gaming side selected random number, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game for acquiring the random number based on the determination result And RJ random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-H There.

  Here, “the random number” in the claims and the present specification including the above includes, for example, “0” to “65535” or It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. The random number is not limited to a mathematically generated random number, and may be a pseudo random number generated by hardware random number, software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method (plus one method) in which the values are sequentially expressed along the random number sequence, the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value There may be mentioned a method (initial value update method) in which)) is determined by a value having chance, a combination of these, and the like. By acquiring random numbers in this manner, it is possible to generate non-periodic random numbers that are unlikely to be expected by the player. Conversely, for example, in the case of the method of generating the next random number using the random number used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating a random number, it is preferable to generate a new random number without using the random number used in the previous lottery.

  Next, the hold control means MJ30 controls the process related to the hold digest and the change start, and the first main game random number obtained in the situation where the first main game symbol change permission has not been lowered. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store, and the first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for holding the random number on the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the symbol variation permission is obtained based on the judgment result. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store the second main gaming side random number acquired in a situation where the second main gaming symbol variation permission has not been lowered, and based on the determination result, the symbol variation permission is given to the random number. The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game obtained in the situation where the auxiliary game symbol variation permission has not come down Auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for determining whether or not to temporarily store a random number, and holding the random number on the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H based on the determination result until the symbol variation permission is obtained. And.

  Here, the reserve / termination control means MJ 31 has a fluctuation start condition satisfaction judging means MJ 31 j which judges whether or not the condition for starting fluctuation is satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B, and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store up to four pieces, combining the random numbers with the holding order The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, for temporary storage in a fixed form. Have.

  Next, the game content determination means MN, if it is a hit as a result of the success or failure lottery, to a special game if the result of the success or failure lottery, and the chance lottery means MN10 to lottery the availability of the special game and the opening or closing of the second main game start mouth electric role B11d Of the special game transition determination means MN20 (for example, internally turning on the hit flag), symbol content determination means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number And a variation mode determination means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time etc.) of each symbol. Here, the lottery means MN10 is a first main game winning lottery with respect to the first main game symbol MN11-A, and a second main game winning lottery means performing a second lottery regarding the second main game symbol It has an MN11-B, and an auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11-H for performing a lottery on the auxiliary game symbol. Here, the first main game success or failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game success or failure lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game success or failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing a success or failure lottery regarding the first main game symbol. First main gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A, second main gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing a 2nd main gaming symbol winning lottery, and a winning / drawing lottery on an auxiliary gaming symbol , And each has a subsidiary gaming lottery table MN11ta-H to be referred to when performing the game. An example of the detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Here, when executing the winning or losing lottery based on the main gaming random number, the winning or not lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main gaming random number value is the same value as any of the per random number values, or If part or all of the random number is a continuous number, the main game random number is judged to be equal to or lower than the upper limit of the random number and to be equal to or higher than the lower limit, thereby executing the propriety determination. . By executing such a propriety determination, accurate determination processing can be performed. On the other hand, when performing a yes / no determination by comparison with only the upper limit of the random number range or with only the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, 0 or 0 when the range of random numbers is 0 to 1023 Since it is necessary to set 1023) as the random number value, it becomes vulnerable to fraud (for example, it is a fraudulent act of sending current to the main control board M and all the bits in the storage area become 0 or 1 easily) There is a risk of Also, in this example, one random number is used to execute one lottery {If a plurality of random numbers are used in one lottery (so-called two-step lottery is performed), two random numbers are used Because it is necessary to prevent it from being synchronized}.

  Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 obtains the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A which determines the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B which determines the stop pattern of the second main game symbol based on the determined game content determination random number (the second main game random number) and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number Auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of the game.

  Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A that is referred to when determining the stop symbol pertaining to the first main game symbol, The said 1st main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A is provided with various lottery tables which differ according to a success / failure result and a game state (For example, regarding a game state, it is for normal game → 1st main game normal game state Lottery table, probability fluctuation game → lottery table for first main game probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening game → lottery table for first main game time shortening gaming state). In addition, the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B to be referred to when determining the stop symbol related to the second main game symbol, The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B is provided with various lottery tables that differ according to the result of the success or the game state (for example, regarding the game state, the normal game → the second main game normal game state lottery Table, probability fluctuation game → lottery table for second main game probability fluctuation game state, time shortening game → lottery table for second main game time shortening game state). An example of the detailed table configuration will be described later. Furthermore, the auxiliary gaming symbol determination means MN41-H has a lottery table MN41ta-H for determining an auxiliary gaming symbol to be referred to when deciding the stop symbol pertaining to the auxiliary gaming symbol, and the lottery for determining the auxiliary gaming symbol The table MN41ta-H is provided with various winning tables which differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary gaming regular lottery table, probability fluctuation gaming and time shortening gaming → auxiliary gaming time shortening lottery table).

  Next, the first main game variation mode determination means for determining the variation mode (such as variation time) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (the first main game random number). A second main game variation mode determination unit MN51-B that determines a variation mode (a variation time etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the MN51-A and the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number); It has an auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H that determines the variation mode (variation time etc.) of the auxiliary game pattern based on the acquired auxiliary game pattern winning random number.

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A which is referred to when determining the variation mode according to the first main game symbol Yes, the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A is provided with various lottery tables that differ according to the success or failure result · gaming state (for example, for the gaming state, normal game → first main game normal Lottery table for gaming state, probability fluctuation game → lottery table for first main gaming probability fluctuation gaming state, time shortening game → lottery table for first main gaming time shortening gaming state). Also, the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B to be referred to when determining the variation mode according to the second main game symbol , The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B is provided with various lottery tables different according to the success or failure result · gaming state (for example, for the game state, normal game → second main game normal game Lottery table for state, probability fluctuation game → lottery table for second main game probability fluctuation game state, time reduction game → lottery table for second main game time reduction game state). An example of the detailed table configuration will be described later. Furthermore, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has a lottery table MN51ta-H for determining an auxiliary game variation mode, which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and the auxiliary game variation mode The lottery table for determination MN51ta-H is provided with various winning tables which differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary gaming regular lottery table, probability fluctuation game and time shortening gaming → auxiliary gaming time shortening lottery table).

  Next, the display control means MP10 is for a predetermined time on the first main game symbol display area A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display area B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C that performs stop display after changing the first main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, for a predetermined time assistance It has the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H which performs control which carries out stop display after changing a game symbol.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C have a first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C (decrement counter) which can be cleared to zero. Furthermore, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, in order to determine whether the second main game start opening electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B satisfies the condition for performing the process of opening and closing the second main game start opening electric combination B11d The second main game start opening electric combination opening condition determination means MP21-B, the second main game start opening electric combination opening timer MP22t to measure the drive (open) time of the second main game start opening electric combination B11d And 有 し B.

  Next, the special game control means MP30 determines whether or not the conditions for shifting to the special game are satisfied, and if the special game transition conditions are satisfied, the contents of the special game (Specifically, the special game content determination means MP32 to determine the special winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the first big prize Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) to open the mouth C10 or the second large winning opening C20 under a predetermined condition, and time management of various processing related to the special game (for example, the first large winning opening And a special game time management means MP34 for performing C10 and opening / closing time of the second large winning opening C20). Here, the special game execution means MP33 and the first and second big winning opening electric role opening and closing control means MP33-C to open and close the first large winning opening electric role C11d and the second large winning opening electric position C21d There is a winning ball counter MP33c that measures winning balls to the first big winning hole C10 and the second big winning hole C20. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. Further, the special game content determination means MP32 further has a special game content reference table MP32ta to be referred to when specifying the contents of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table The details of (not shown).

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 determines whether or not the termination condition of the probability variation gaming state is satisfied, and whether the termination condition of the time shortening gaming state is satisfied or not. When it is determined that the short game termination condition determination means MP52 is included. Here, the time saving game end condition determining means MP52 has a time reduction counter MP52c capable of counting the time reduction. Here, the “specific game” is, for example, a probability variation game in which the lottery probability for the special game is higher than that in the normal game, or a time reduction game in which the fluctuation time of the main gaming symbol is relatively shorter than that in the normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time shortening game, the variation time of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol is relatively shortened compared to the non-time shortening gaming in progress (time shortening function). Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and the open extension time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (open time extension function). In addition, the time shortening game in this embodiment ends when the total value of the number of fluctuations of the first main gaming symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second main gaming symbol exceeds a predetermined number (probability fluctuation gaming without time limit restriction) except for). That is, the time reduction number is configured to be subtracted for each change (stop) of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol. In addition, the above-mentioned probability variation game end condition judging means MP51 and time saving game end condition judging means MP52, for example, the transition lottery from the specified game (for example probability fluctuation game and time shortening game) to the normal game May have a function to perform (in the case of a so-called pachinko gaming machine having a fall lottery function). Note that the time reduction gaming state according to the present embodiment may be that the main game time short flag is on, or the auxiliary game time short flag may be on, that is, the time reduction game state May indicate that the open time extension function is operating, or the non-time saving gaming state may indicate that the open time extension function is not active. The time saving gaming state may be referred to as a specific gaming state, and the non-time shortening gaming state may be referred to as a normal gaming state. Also, the probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a high probability lottery state, and the non-probability variation gaming state may be referred to as a low probability lottery state.

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB includes a first main game (a game from a change of a first main game symbol to a stop) and a second main game (a change of a second main game symbol to a stop) First and second main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current gaming state in the game), and auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current gaming state in the auxiliary game H and special game related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in any round, various flags related to special games, etc.) Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB 20 b and the current game state (for example, the number of remaining time short, the various flags related to the specific game, etc.) in the specific game Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C is a stop related to the first or second main gaming symbol (the first or second main gaming symbol for which the variation start condition is established) in the present fluctuation It has first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbol and variation mode information.

  In addition, the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H is the auxiliary gaming symbol information temporary storage for temporarily storing information such as a stop symbol related to the auxiliary gaming symbol currently being changed (the auxiliary gaming symbol for which the change start condition is satisfied). It has means MB11b-H.

  Next, gaming peripherals will be described. Note that some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, so the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the gaming peripherals are a first main gaming peripheral A which is a peripheral of the first main gaming side, a second main gaming peripheral B which is a peripheral of the second main gaming side, and a first main gaming side The first and second main game common peripheral device C, which is a common peripheral device on the second main game side, an auxiliary game peripheral device H regarding an auxiliary game, a sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, and a sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like are included. Here, the effects controlled by the sub main control unit SM are the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decoration) synchronized in time with the fluctuations of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol It relates to the display of only the information which does not affect the result of the game including the fluctuation of the symbol). Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A is a first main game start port A10 that triggers a transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can perform stop display and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B is a second main game symbol display device B20 capable of the second main game start port B10, which is a trigger for transition to a special game, and the second main game symbol stop display and variable display. And.

  Next, the first and second main game common peripheral devices C are in the closed state at the time of the normal game, and in the special game (big hit), the first big winning opening C10 which is opened under the predetermined condition And the second large winning opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary gaming peripheral device H is an auxiliary gaming start opening H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game starting opening electric combination B11d of the second main game starting opening B10, and a stop indication and change indication of the auxiliary gaming symbol. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 that can be played.

  Next, the effect display control means (sub main control unit) SM is a display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, determination processing of effect contents relating to effect display, and display control processing And an information transmission / reception control means SM40 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS. The respective means will be described in detail below.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has a main side information temporary storage means SM11 b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information concerning the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20 is a decoration symbol display control means SM21 which controls the determination process and display control processing of the variation pattern and the stop pattern of the decoration symbol (the first decoration symbol and the second decoration symbol); (1) Design holding information display control means SM22 for managing the number of held pieces of the decoration symbol and the second decoration pattern and holding display processing; background effect display control means SM23 for determining the background image and display control processing; A preview effect display control means SM24 for controlling the content determination process and the display control process, and a reach effect display control means SM25 for determining the reach effect content determination process and the display control process are included.

  Here, based on the information from the main control board M side, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is a decorative symbol {in the present embodiment, two kinds of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol) There are cases where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are independent of each other, and the game is performed by combining the three numeric symbols of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. Various information (variation aspect) concerning the design variation of decorative design (the first decoration symbol and the second decoration pattern) which determines the stop design of the result which can be notified and the change pattern of the stop pattern and the variation mode Information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.) temporary display means related to the temporary display SM21b display design related information, and the first time for measuring the variation time of the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) Design fluctuation time management Thailand It has a SM21t-1, the. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM21n is a drawing (reference) table for drawing fluctuation content determination which is referred to when determining the stop design and the variation mode of the decoration design (the first decoration design and the second decoration design). SM21 ta (not shown for the details of the table) and decoration contents (first and second decoration patterns) decoration contents referred to when deciding (or setting) display content, display update timing and display update contents It further has a symbol effect table SM21 ta-2. Note that both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are independently display-controlled by the effect display control means (sub main control unit) SM based on the information from the main control board M side. And, by using these two kinds of decorative symbols well, it is configured to enhance the interest in the stage or to make it easy to grasp the progress of the game, but this point will be described later. Do.

  Next, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has a drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information on the hold related to the decorative symbols (first and second decorative symbols). .

  Next, on the basis of the information from the main control board M, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores the information relating to the background effect display, and the background effect display content determining means SM23n which determines the display content of the background effect. And background rendering related information temporary storage means SM23b.

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 determines, based on the information from the main control board M, the display contents and display timing of the notice effect, etc. The temporary presentation related information temporary storage means SM 24 b for temporarily storing the information.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines reach display content determination means SM25n for determining the display content and display timing of the reach effect based on the information from the main control board M side, and information related to the reach effect display And the reach production related information temporary storage means SM 25 b for temporarily storing

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is a sub information transmission / reception control means SS10 for controlling information transmission / reception with the sub main control unit SM, and an image display for displaying an image on the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG. And control means SS20. Here, the image display control unit SS20 further includes an image display related information temporary storage unit SS21b for temporarily storing information related to display of commands and various images received from the sub main control unit SM side.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to the effect display device SG which displays an image concerning the effect based on the information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 is a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) in a variable manner, and a first hold display area SG12 (and the second And 2 hold display unit SG13).

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub sub control unit ) SS is connected to the secondary game control means (sub main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is the sub-game control Means (sub main control unit) means to be controlled by SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  From here, an example of the flow of a general process in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described using a flowchart. The flowchart mainly includes processing steps (shown as rectangles), judgments (shown as diamonds), flow lines (arrows), and terminals (shown as rounded rectangles) indicating start / end / return etc. . Also, in the case where the details of the processing steps are illustrated in another flowchart, those referring to the other flowchart are illustrated as a subroutine (shown as a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, at the development stage of the gaming machine, it is also carried out to simultaneously develop gaming machines with different specifications, but in this example, the subroutine executed by the gaming machines with different specifications in the processing on the main side ( It is configured so as not to leave a subroutine not normally used, and prevents processing relating to an unused subroutine that is not normally executed due to noise or cheating.

  First, FIG. 5 is a main flow chart showing a flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After the game machine is powered on, the process of FIG. That is, after power on of the gaming machine, after performing initialization (not shown), the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button in step 1002, and resets the power supply unit E reset button (RAM clear It is determined whether or not the manager of the game arcade has intentionally performed an operation to clear the contents of the RAM. If Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the contents of the RAM on the side of the main control board M (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB). Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at that timing) At this timing, a command may be set and may be configured to be transmitted in a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, it is stored in the checksum and RAM area recorded at the time of power interruption) Compare with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether the content of the RAM is not normal (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is correctly backed up in the RAM) based on the check result. If Yes in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to the process of step 1004 (the above-described RAM clear process). On the other hand, if the result of step 1010 is NO, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM of the main control board M in step 1012. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side (may be transmitted at the corresponding timing, or the command is set at the corresponding timing to be described later. It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, a hardware interrupt every about 1.5 ms) related to the main processing on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt cycle is allowed to be T) {as a result, when the execution fixed interrupt timing is reached, the diagram (b) is executed}, and the process proceeds to step 1018. . After the step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number updating processes (for example, an increment process of the random number counter) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  In addition, it is preferable that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM, etc.) mounted on the main control board M is configured not to be a value at which the special game is executed (noise or cheating immediately after the processing of the program starts). By doing this, in order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the processing for determining the execution of the special game is executed).

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the processing of FIG. 7B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt cycle T (for example, a hardware interrupt every approximately 1.5 ms), at step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, in step 1200, the main control board M executes a motorized product drive determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, at step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, in step 1500, the main control board M executes a special game operating condition determination process described later. Next, at step 1600, the main control board M executes special game control processing described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (in particular, the winning ball payout determining means MH) performs a winning ball payout control process (drive control of the winning ball dispensing device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening on which the gaming ball has won. A process for causing the payout control board KH to execute and managing the result is executed. Next, at step 1998, the main control board M executes output processing of an external signal (output of information to an external terminal board, a hall computer HC or the like). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (sends the command set in each process described above to the sub main control unit side), and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. It returns to the processing which had been done. In the control command transmission process, the order in which the sub main control unit SM receives the commands is important (for example, the process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command) Since there is a case, the command is configured to be transmitted in the order in which the main control board M determines to transmit the command (in the order in which the command is set).

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the process of FIG. Be done. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, NMI interrupt), in step 1020, the main control board M sets power-off time information (for example, checksum) based on the information of the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area and prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to a power-off wait loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of the auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, at step 1102, the auxiliary game start opening ball determination means MJ11-H determines whether or not the game ball has entered the auxiliary game start port H10 (flow in, in the case of a gate, passage). In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21 -H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32 b -H, and the hold ball is not the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces) Determine if In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ 32-H holds the holding ball in the form of setting the random number in the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-H together with the information indicating the number of the second holding. Is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). Also in the case of No in step 1102 or step 1104, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the motorized prize drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, at step 1202, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and the electric combination open flag is off. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and determines whether or not the auxiliary gaming symbol fluctuation flag is off. Do. If Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-H, and determines whether or not there is a holding ball regarding the auxiliary gaming symbol . In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary gaming symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and refers to the gaming state on the auxiliary gaming side (flag state of auxiliary game time short flag). While acquiring, with reference to the lottery table MN41ta-H for auxiliary game symbol determination, the stop design is decided on the basis of the game state of the said auxiliary game side and the auxiliary game symbol random number which is based on the retention sphere (for example, auxiliary game time short flag Is selected, the winning symbol is selected with high probability as compared to the case where it is turned off), and the temporary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H is temporarily stored. Next, at step 1218, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H is based on the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (the auxiliary gaming time short flag flag state), the auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-C of the auxiliary gaming symbol A predetermined time relating to the fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game time short flag is on, and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game time short flag is off) is set. Then, in step 1220, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball relating to the auxiliary gaming symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the variation display of the auxiliary gaming symbol on the auxiliary gaming symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, at step 1224, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol variation management timer MP11t-C and determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary gaming symbol has been reached. Do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary gaming symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H in step 1226 to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary gaming symbol, and the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is fixedly displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Then, at step 1228, the auxiliary gaming symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary gaming symbol variation flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, at step 1230, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close condition determination means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is "hit". In the case of Yes in step 1230, in step 1232, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B is the second main game based on the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (flag state of auxiliary game time short flag) A predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds if the auxiliary game time short flag is on, 0.5 if the auxiliary game time short flag is off, for example, the auxiliary game time short flag is on) Set the second). Next, at step 1234, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B turns on the electric combination open flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B opens the second main game start opening electric combination B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start opening electric combination open timer MP22t-B, at the open time of the electric combination. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1240 and step 1242, the second main game start opening electric combination open / close control means MP20-B closes the second main game start opening electric combination B11 d and the auxiliary gaming state is temporary. In the flag area of the storage means MB10-H, the motorized part open flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If NO in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238. If NO in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224. If NO in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, or step 1238, the next process is performed. It transfers to (the process of step 1300).

  Moreover, in this flowchart, after the stop symbol display in step 1226 for convenience, although it transfers to the following step immediately after, it is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to shift to the next process after the stop display fixed time of about 500 ms (for example, this process is performed by performing the branch process using the stop display fixed flag and the timer). Is achievable).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start slot entrance ball determining means MJ11-A is the first main game start slot entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start slot A10, and the first main game start slot entrance information Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-A, and the main game (especially the first main game Side) determines whether the holding ball for the side is not the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A acquires a first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as a first main game content determination random number, a lottery random number for determining success or failure, a symbol lottery random number for determining a symbol when hit, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. Three random numbers of variation mode lottery random number to be acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update cycles and random number ranges, respectively, and are obtained sequentially at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ 32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the hold control means MJ 30 transmits a command transmission buffer for transmitting information (first main game hold occurrence command) indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired to the sub main control unit SM. The MT 10 is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. Also in the case of No in step 1302 or step 1304, the process proceeds to step 1312.

  Next, in step 1312, the second main game start slot entrance ball determining means MJ11-B is operated from the second main game start slot entrance detector B11s of the second main game start slot B10. It is determined whether the information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21 -B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32 b -B, and the main game (especially the second main game Side) determines whether the holding ball for the side is not the upper limit (for example, 4 pieces). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-B acquires a second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of a winning lottery random number, a symbol lottery random number, and a variation aspect lottery random number are acquired similarly to the first main game content determining means. By the way, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the lottery random number for the first main game and the lottery random number for the second main game Acquisition range of) is set to the same. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol holding means MJ 32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-B. . Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ 30 transmits a command transmission buffer for transmitting information (second main game hold occurrence command) to the effect that the second main game random number has been acquired to the sub main control unit SM. The MT 10 is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 1400). Also in the case of No in step 1312 or step 1314, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1400).

  In this embodiment, the information to the effect that the random number is acquired is transmitted as the information to be transmitted to the sub main control unit SM in step 1310 and step 1320, but the information of the random number and the main game symbol The number of reservations may be attached and transmitted, or it may be substituted as information to the effect that random numbers have been acquired using these information.

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, at step 1401, the reserve / termination control means MJ 31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-B to check whether or not there is a second main game symbol hold. If Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later in step 1400 (2), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1500).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning sequence is the first main game symbol) The second main game symbol is configured to be prioritized and executed, but it is not limited to this. May be configured to execute a parallel lottery that randomly draws).

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this processing is substantially the same processing on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1403, the reserve / termination control unit MJ 31 determines whether or not a change start condition is established. Here, the change start condition is not during special game (or during operation of the condition device), and is not during main game symbol fluctuation, and there is a condition that there is a hold of the main game symbol. In addition, although not illustrated in this example, when the fluctuation fixed time (time to stop and display the finalized display symbol after the final display of the main gaming symbol) is provided, the fluctuation start condition of the next fluctuation during the fluctuation fixed time May not be satisfied.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in step 1405 and step 1406, the holding and digesting control means MJ31 is set to the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (the second main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). While reading out the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the present symbol variation temporarily stored, the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ 32b-A (second main game The symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ 32b-B) is deleted, and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (holding and digesting processing). Next, in step 1410-1, the lottery means MN10 refers to the first main gaming coin lottery table MN11ta-A (the second main gaming coin lottery MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state. [1] Based on the main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (in particular, a winning lottery random number), a main gaming symbol acceptance lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game use lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game use lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability variation gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot probability in the non-probability variation gaming state. The winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, although a case in which the game state can not be shifted (so-called small hit) is not illustrated, a small hit may be generated (a small hit is won). In addition, when configured as such, for example, (1) the probability of winning a small hit differs between the first main game side and the second main game side, the first main game side is more than the second main game side Also easy to win (the second main game side does not have to set a small hit), (2) If you win a small hit, the game state after the small hit is the same as the game state before the small hit start (The game state after the big hit end may be different from the game state before the big hit start if the big hit is won), (3) The big hit is the 1st main game side and the 2nd main game side The win probability is the same, and the win probability is high due to the probability fluctuation gaming state, but the win probability is different between the first main game and the second main game in the small hit. The winning probability is not changed by gaining and becoming a probability fluctuation gaming state, (4) for a small hit As a stop symbol of the decoration symbol of the selected symbol variation, the "special symbol" (for example, ★ such as "2 ★ 2" or "3 ★ 9" corresponds to the "special symbol") for the small hit win only (5) As a stop symbol of the decorative symbol of the symbol variation won in the small hit, it is not a combination of three of the same symbol, and a specific result which is a combination of numbers having a certain regularity (for example, " Or the like), “432” etc., odd order such as “357” etc.) may stop (6) similar to a small hit (or similar to a small hit, as seen from the player) Big winning opening opening mode {visibility) is a big hit (2R or more, the number of rounds is different, but it looks like the same opening mode when viewed from the player (small hit is only one round, the relevant The big winning opening is opened multiple times in one round, and the big hit is opened the same number of times as the multiple times concerned (In such a case, it is preferable to stop and display a combination of decorative symbols that the player can not easily distinguish whether it is a small hit or a big hit). (8) In the second decorative symbol, the small hit dedicated "special symbol" does not stop (or may not stop), and (9) it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a small hit or a big hit. Even in the configuration in which the combination is stopped and displayed, the ratio of small hit or big hit differs depending on the kind of combination of decorative symbols that the player can not distinguish easily (for example, after the big hit ends by aligning three) When the stop symbol includes a decorative symbol whose transition to the probability variation gaming state is substantially deterministic, the probability of being a big hit is higher than the case where it is not included.

  Next, at step 141-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (the second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) is a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (the second main game). With reference to the symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), it relates to the main gaming symbol based on the main gaming symbol equality lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) The stop symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, "4A, 5A, 7A" and "4B, 5B, 7B") are selected. One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a big hit symbol. The number of special game rounds determined with reference to the main game symbol is 4R for 4A and 5A, 8R for 4B and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. The random number value and the type of stop symbol are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the lost symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. If a specific symbol is stopped and displayed, the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main gaming symbol may be different from that before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed (limited frequency state). May be configured to migrate}.

  Next, in step 141-03, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A (the second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B) is a lottery for determining the first main game variation mode corresponding to each gaming state. With reference to the table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main gaming symbol acceptance lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (the second main game content determination random number) (especially, variation The variation mode of the main game symbols is determined based on the random selection pattern random number), and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to step 1414.

  Here, FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 (main game table 3) are an example of the first main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game change mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, both the first main game side and the second main game side are based on the main lottery result of the main game symbol, the main game time short flag state, and the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation A variation mode (variation time) of the main gaming symbol is configured to be determined. In other words, if the main lottery game lottery result is a hit, it is easy to determine the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively long, and if the main game time short flag is on (time saving game state) relative The fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is short is easy to be determined, and the fluctuation mode in which the fluctuation time is relatively short compared to the case where the number of reservations is 0 to 1 when the number of reservations is 2 to 3 Is configured so that it is easy to determine (only at the time of losing). In addition, this example is an example to the last, and it is not limited at all by the kind of a stop symbol, selection rate, etc. In addition, the symbol variation time of the first main game may be relatively long in the time shortening gaming state (when the main game short flag is on) {symbol variation on the second main game When it is configured to be advantageous for the player to be executed, it is easy for the second main game side to be suspended by lowering the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (as it is advantageous for the player) In order to construct a situation, it is particularly effective when the starting opening on the first main game side and the starting opening on the second main game side can not be separated. Note that “the effect mode executed on the sub side” shows an example of the effect to be executed when each variation mode is selected. In addition, as an effect mode to be executed on the sub side, pseudo continuous fluctuation described later (effect that looks as if a plurality of symbol fluctuations have occurred during a single fluctuation display of the main game symbol) is executed. The player may be provided with a “pseudo series failure rendering” which is an effect notifying that the pseudo continuous variation is not executed after asking the player whether or not the player is the same. The random number distribution (execution frequency) of “pseudo series failure production → lost appearance stop” in the gaming state of in the case where the number of reservations is 0 or 1 is greater than in the case where the number of reservations is 2 or 3 May be configured (in either non-time shortening gaming state or time shortening gaming state, it may be configured as such), and if "simulation run success effect" is executed, pseudo continuation which will be described later For the player whether or not the change is executed It may be configured to notify that the pseudo-continuous variation is performed after the Tsu. In addition, “pseudo series failure production” and “pseom series success production” are effects using “special symbol” or specified number of eyes described later, for example, “pseudo series failure production” is executed After asking the player whether or not the special symbol temporarily stops in the middle row, the decorative symbol after one frame of the special symbol stops in the middle row (provisional stop), and the “pseudo series success effect” is displayed. When the game is executed, the player is asked if the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped in the middle row or not, and then the "special symbol" is stopped (provisionally stopped) in the middle row. There is. In addition, in order to cause the second main game hold during the fluctuation of the first main gaming symbol in the time shortening gaming state is irregular symbol fluctuation, according to the first main gaming symbol according to the loss of the time shortening gaming state The contents of the fluctuation mode determination table may be configured such that a short time fluctuation mode is not selected regardless of the number of reservations (e.g., all have a fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more). The number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of first main game holding and second main game holding, but in the case of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the first main It is the number of game holdings, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, the second main game holding number.

  Next, in step 1414, the game content determination means MN temporarily changes the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, attribute information of stop symbol) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Set the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM the information related to the determined main gaming symbol such as fluctuation mode information etc. and the command relating to the current gaming state (control command transmission in step 1999) The processing is sent to the sub main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C set the predetermined time relating to the change time of the main game symbol to the first and second main game symbol change management timer MP11t-C. Do. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display portion A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). In accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C on the second main game symbol display portion B21g), the variable display of the main game symbol is started. Next, in step 1418, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn on the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Control is passed to step 1420.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refer to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C and change. It is determined whether the medium flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420, and in the case of No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500).

  Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determine whether or not a predetermined time related to the change time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C send information (design confirmation display instruction command) indicating that symbol variation is finished to the sub main control unit SM side The command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the first main game symbol display area A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variation display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display section B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbol stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C is displayed as the fixed stop symbol Control. Next, at step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turn off the fluctuating flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, in step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. Do. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1432, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device activation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB 20b. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, step 1432 is skipped.

  Next, in step 1450, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1500). Also in the case of No at step 1420, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500).

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, in step 1452, the specific game control means MP 50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB 30 b and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1470, the specific game control means MP 50 refers to the value of the time reduction number counter MP 52 c and determines whether the counter value is larger than 0 or not. In the case of Yes in step 1470, in step 1472 the specific game control means MP50 subtracts 1 from the count value of the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, at step 1474, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the value of the time reduction counter MP52c to determine whether the counter value (remaining time reduction number) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1474, in steps 1476 and 1478, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game time short flag and the auxiliary game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Processing (processing of step 1500). Also in the case of No in step 1452, step 1470 or step 1474, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1500).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, in step 1502, the condition determination unit MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage unit MB20b to determine whether the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1514, the special game control means MP30 is in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, a specific game flag Turn off the flag). Next, at step 1518, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time saving number counter MP52c. Next, at step 1520, the special game control means MP30 turns on the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1522, the special game control unit MP30 turns off the condition device activation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage unit MB20b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 1600). Also in the case of No in step 1502, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and the special game execution flag Turn on. Next, in step 1607, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game execution means MP33 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (special game start display instruction command) to the effect of starting a special game to the sub main control unit ( In the control command transmission process of step 1999, the sub main control unit SM side is transmitted), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

  On the other hand, if No in step 1602, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether the special game execution flag is on. Then, in the case of Yes in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. In the case of No in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the permission for the special game is not received, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1612, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. Determine if there is. If Yes in step 1612, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 sets an open pattern in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1616, the special game execution means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1620, the special game execution means MP33 drives the first big winning opening electric combination C11d (or the second large winning opening electric combination C21d) of the first large winning opening C10 to make a first large winning combination. The mouth C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is opened, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set to the special game timer MP34t (especially the opening time timer), and the process proceeds to step 1622. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1612, that is, when the special winning opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processing of steps 1614 to 1620.

  Next, in step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current number of rounds, the number of game balls to be won, etc.) pertaining to the current special game to the sub main control unit SM side. The command transmission buffer MT10 for the command is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side in the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1624, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and the predetermined number (for example, 10) of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening C20) in the round. It is determined whether or not there is a winning ball of the ball). In the case of Yes at step 1624, the process goes to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (in particular, the open time timer) in step 1626 for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to opening of the special winning opening. It is determined whether it has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. In the case of No at step 1626, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, in step 1628, the special game execution means MP33 is the first large winning opening electric combination C11d of the first large winning opening C10 (or the second large winning opening electric combination C21d of the second large winning opening C20) The driving is stopped and the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the special game execution means MP33 resets the special game timer MP34t (in particular, the open time timer). Next, in step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1634, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and whether or not the final round is over (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b It is determined whether the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game execution means MP33 sets the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (special game end display instruction command) to the effect of ending the special game to the sub main control unit SM side. (The control command transmission processing in step 1999 is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side). Then, in step 1650, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997). Also in the case of No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game, according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, at step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probability change big hit symbol (probability fluctuation gaming state after the end of special game execution It is a jackpot symbol to shift, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 5A, 5B, 7A, 7B). If Yes in step 1652, in step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1658. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1652, that is, in the case of the stop symbol being a big hit symbol which does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the termination of the special game, the step 1656 Then, the specific game control means MP50 sets the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example), and proceeds to step 1658.

  Next, in steps 1658 and 1660, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time short flag and the auxiliary game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the next process (step (Processing of 1997).

  Next, control processing executed on the side of the sub main control unit SM will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 18 is a main flowchart of the sub control board S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 6A is a process on the side of the sub main control unit SM which is executed after resetting such as when the power is turned on to the gaming machine. That is, when power is supplied to the gaming machine, in step 2002, the sub main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (the main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information When received → Initialize the sub-side RAM, when various information commands are received → Resetting related information at power-off to the sub-side RAM). Next, in step 2003, the sub main control unit SM restores the number of reservations (for example, the drawing suspension counter value) based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side). Note that the effect being performed is not restored, and the "under preparation" screen is displayed until the start of the next change. Thereafter, the process shifts to loop processing in which (b), which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub main control unit SM, is repeatedly executed. Here, when (b) is executed, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM first performs a hold information management process described later in step 2100 as shown in the process of FIG. Run. Next, in step 2200, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a first decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2350, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a second decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes special game related display control processing described later. Next, in step 2500, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a background effect control process described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes display command transmission control processing (sends the command set by these series of subroutines to the sub sub control unit SS side), End the repeat processing routine.

  As described above, the sub main control unit SM employs a mode in which the sub main routine (S2100 to S2999) is loop-processed after being reset. Further, the process of FIG. 6C is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line in the main control board M described above is one terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example , NMI terminal) is the processing flow (c) when it is connected. That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub main control unit SM receives a command input port from the main control board M side ( Check the input port of the data signal line mentioned above. Then, at step 2006, based on the check result, the sub main control unit SM sends a command sent from the main control board M to the RAM on the sub main control unit SM side (for example, main side information temporary storage means SM11 b). Are temporarily stored, and the process returns to the process that was being performed immediately before this interrupt process.

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and a command relating to the new hold generation from the main control board M side (first main game symbol or second main It is determined whether or not hold information pertaining to the game symbol has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is a drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, A maximum of four for the second main game is added "1". Next, in step 2106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 holds the hold information (in particular, the random number value and the hold prefetching group information related to the main game symbol lottery) based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. ) Is temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM 22 b, and the process shifts to step 2118.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2102, at step 2111, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and receives a symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 2111, in step 2112 the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b. Next, in step 2114, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 deletes the suspension information (especially, the random number value related to the main game symbol lottery) related to the symbol variation from the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b. , Shift the remaining pending information. Next, in step 2116, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21 b, and proceeds to step 2118. Also in the case of No at step 2111, the process proceeds to step 2118.

  Next, in step 2118, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS on the effect display device SG (in particular, on the first hold display portion SG12, the second hold display portion SG13). The reservation images of the same number as the drawing suspension counter values in the diagram suspension information temporary storage means SM22b are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the symbol content determination permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the figure display content determination means SM21 n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21 b. Next, in step 2206, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) is the symbol information (temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). The first decorative symbol (as described above, displayed based on the information from the main control board M side) with reference to the stop symbol / variation mode pertaining to the main game symbol and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta A stop symbol to be controlled, which is a so-called decorative symbol, and the details of its display size and operation contents will be described later {eg, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol, "7 · 7 · 7 ", etc., if it is a lost symbol, a number such as" 1.3.5 ", etc.} and a variation aspect {eg, a variation related to the main game symbol If there is a short-term fluctuation, non-reach, if it is a long-term fluctuation, normal reach or super reach etc.} is determined and drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice effect related information temporary storage means It temporarily stores in SM24b and reach production related information temporary storage means SM25b). Here, in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is configured in three rows of the left row, the middle row, and the right row, and the effective line (a line in which the result of the determination can be notified by arranging three numerical symbols) ) Is one line, and if the same numeral symbol is aligned with the effective line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same numeral symbol does not align with the effective line, it is lost). In addition, in the left row, middle row, right row (or only in the middle row), "special symbol" other than the number symbol (when displayed on the effective line, it does not mean a big hit, but after that it is a big hit It is a symbol foretelling that it may occur, and the details of its display size and operation content will be described later) can be stopped (temporarily stopped), and it can be temporarily stopped in the middle of the symbol variation also about the number symbol It is done. In addition, temporary stop is to temporarily display the decorative symbols of all the rows temporarily during the period from the start of the variable display of the main game symbol to the stop display, and the decorative symbols that are temporarily displayed for the temporary stop are displayed. This means that the variable display can be started again during the period (hereinafter, used in the same meaning). In addition, although the details will be described later, the “special symbol” in the pseudo continuous fluctuation can be temporarily stopped (temporary stop), and is not determined stop and is not included in the stop mode notifying a big hit It is configured, and "special symbol" at the time of pre-reading effect execution is configured not to be included in the stop mode that can be temporarily stopped (temporary stop), can be decided stop, and reports a big hit. .

  Next, in step 2208, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) stores the symbol information (temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b). The second decorative symbol (as described above, display control based on the information from the main control board M side with reference to the stop symbol / variation mode pertaining to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta Stop symbol (for example, when the stop symbol pertaining to the main game symbol is a big hit symbol), the symbol "7 · 7 · 7 Etc.], if it is a lost symbol, "1 · 3 · 5 etc. Number barrage eye" and fluctuation mode {eg, fluctuation mode according to the main game pattern If there is a short-term fluctuation, non-reach, if it is a long-term fluctuation, normal reach or super reach etc.} is determined and drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b , Reach production related information temporary storage means SM25b) temporarily stored. Here, in the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured in three rows of the left row, the middle row, and the right row, and the effective line (line in which the same numeral pattern is effective is one line) If the same numeral pattern is aligned with the effective line, it means a big hit (conversely, if the same numeral pattern does not align with the effective line, it means a loss). In addition, only the number symbol can be stopped in the left row, middle row and right row ("special symbol" does not stop like the first decorative symbol), and it is configured not to stop temporarily during symbol variation . As described above, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to independently determine the display content for informing the user of the main gaming symbol, that is, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. The decorative symbol has the nature that both sides can independently notify the result of the outcome concerning the main game symbol as its basic property.

  Next, in step 2216, the drawing display content determination means SM21n is the result of the main gaming symbol's success or failure temporarily stored in the main information temporary storage means SM11b and the decoration pattern (the first decoration symbol and the second decoration symbol) Based on the variation mode, the decoration symbol effect content is determined with reference to the decoration symbol effect table SM21 ta-2 (for example, the decoration symbol effect table 1 to the decoration symbol effect table 2) in the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21 ta, The display update timing and the display update content are set and temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2218, the figure display content determination means SM21 n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21 b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300). Transition. Also in the case of No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  In the above description, the main game symbol whose display is controlled on the main control board M side is the one on the first main game side (first main game symbol) or the one on the second main game side Although it is not mentioned whether it is the second main game symbol), basically, even if the display content of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is determined in correspondence with the first main game symbol The display content of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be determined in correspondence with the second main gaming symbol, that is, the first main gaming symbol variation display and the second main gaming symbol Even when any of the variable display is performed, the variable display of both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be made executable in conjunction with that. However, in the time reduction gaming state (a state with a so-called power support state), it is not limited to that, for example, in the time reduction gaming state, the fluctuation display of the first main gaming symbol and the fluctuation of the second main gaming symbol It is possible to illustrate that only one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be made to be in a state where it is possible to execute the variable display in conjunction with any of the display, if any of the display is performed.

  Here, FIGS. 21 and 22 (decorative symbol effect table 1, decorative symbol effect table 2) are portions of the decorative symbol effect table SM21 ta-2 (decorative symbol effect table 1, particularly, in the case where the result of the acceptance is lost) And, it is an example of the decorative symbol effect table 2, in particular, a part of the case where the success or failure result is a big hit. In the drawings, the first decorative symbol may be simply described as a first mounting, and the second decorative symbol may be described as a second mounting (the same applies hereinafter). As shown in the present example, in the present embodiment, the main game symbol success or failure result (shown in the left end row, in the present example, "lost" or "big hit") and the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) And the variation pattern of the second decorative pattern (shown in the second row on the left), and in this example, only in the case of "simulative failure (total presentation time 30 seconds)" and "super reach (total presentation time 60 seconds)" Based on the illustration) and the acquired random number value (the random number value acquired on the sub main board SM side and a part of the random number is shown in the left third column), the decorative symbol effect contents (the fourth left column) In this example, “main effect A-1 (loss) pseudo ream 1” and “main effect B-1 (big hit) pseudo ream none” or the like can be determined. Then, when the decorative symbol effect contents are determined, the "display update timing" and the "display update content" can be uniquely determined. For example, in the case where the decorative symbol effect content = "A-1 (loss) pseudo ream 1", "display update content" = "improvement" at "display update timing" = "at start of change (after 0 seconds)" It is decided that figure fluctuation start (all lines of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), and "display update content" = "display update content" = "first rendering temporary stop display" at "display update timing" = "after 12 seconds of change start" (Left column), "No. 2nd display non-display" is determined. Then, as described later, the "display update content" that has reached the "display update timing" corresponds to the first decorative symbol according to the elapsed time related to the variation time of the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) It will be sequentially performed with respect to each of the second decorative symbol. That is, when "A-1 (loss) pseudo ream 1" is determined, after all rows of the first decorative symbol and all rows of the second decorative symbol are variably displayed, "display update timing" = "variation start" In the case where display control is performed so that all the rows are not displayed (the state in which the variable display is displayed is not displayed) for the first decorative symbol until reaching “after 12 seconds”, regarding the second decorative symbol The display is controlled so that all columns are variably displayed (variation display can be viewed visually), and when “display update timing” = “after 12 seconds of variation start” is reached, the first decorative symbol is displayed. As for the second decorative symbol, the display control is performed so that all the rows are not displayed (the variable display is not displayed), while the display control is performed so that only the left column stops. . As described above, in the basic operation in the example of the present example, when the first decorative symbol is in a state in which the player can visually recognize (is easy to visually recognize), the second decorative symbol indicates the player. If the first decorative symbol is not visible to the player (not visible to the player), the second decorative symbol is visible to the player (the visual symbol is invisible to the player). In order to ensure that the player is notified that the symbol is changing, the second decorative symbol is complementarily displayed. In addition, the effect pattern (a series of display contents) defined by "A-1 (loss) pseudo ream 1" and the effect pattern defined by the name of other decorative symbol effect contents are different (that is, the display contents are different) ) To be a supplement. Moreover, the range of the random number value is “0 to 1023” in all the variation modes, and this drawing excerpts a part of the random number range in the figure variation mode (therefore corresponding to a certain figure variation mode The random number range of the acquired random number value and the random number range of the acquired random number value corresponding to the figure variation mode different from the certain figure variation mode are respectively different, but both are “0 to 1023” Range).

  Here, in the present embodiment, so-called pseudo continuous variation is configured to be executable, and more specifically, the decorative symbol effect contents "A-1 (loss) pseudo run 1" in the present example, "A-2 (Loss) pseudo ream 2 "," B-2 (big hit) pseudo ream 2 ". For example, in the decorative symbol effect content "A-2 (loss) pseudo reunion 2", "display update content" = "draft change start (display change timing) =" at start of change (after 0 seconds) " 1) After “all the lines of the decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol” are executed, “display update timing” = “after 12 seconds of fluctuation start”, “after 13 seconds of fluctuation start”, “after 14 seconds of fluctuation start” Display update content = "1st rendering temporary stop display (left row)" (the left row of the first decorative symbol is stop display), "1st rendering temporary stop display (right row)" (the first decorative symbol) The right column shows stop display), and the "first drawing special symbol temporary stop display" (the middle display of the first decorative symbol is stop display with "special symbol" described above) is sequentially executed. After that, “display update content” = “first pattern change start (all rows)” (only the first decorative symbol changes again in all rows) is displayed at “display update timing” = “after 15 seconds of change start” After execution, “Display update timing” = “After 26 seconds of fluctuation start”, “After 27 seconds of fluctuation start”, “After 28 seconds of fluctuation start” “Display update contents” = “1st draft temporary stop display ( "Left row)" (the left row of the first decorative symbol is stop display), "first rendering temporary stop display (right row)" (the right row of the first decorative symbol is stop display), "first rendering special symbol The temporary stop display "(in which the middle row of the first decorative symbol is stopped with the above-mentioned" special symbol ") is sequentially executed, so that for the player, the first change display of the main gaming symbol is performed for the first time. 1 It seems that there is a plurality of pattern variations occurring in the case of a decorative pattern (this pseudo-continuous) And how the dynamic is being performed, how the "special symbols" are stopped and displayed, see an image view of FIG. 40).

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case where the first decorative symbol is not displayed (a state in which the stop display / variation display is not displayed), and the middle row of the first decorative symbol is the aforementioned "special symbol". When the temporary stop is performed, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed, and in other cases, the second decorative symbol is not displayed. That is, when it is possible for the player to visually recognize the first decorative symbol or it is possible to determine which symbol is stopping as the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol is not displayed (the first decorative symbol is not displayed). The player can not visually recognize the first decorative symbol, or it can not be determined which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol (for example, When the “special symbol” is stopped and the numbers in the middle row (or all the rows) can not be determined}, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, so that the player always has A decorative symbol (one of a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol) can be visually recognized, and it is configured easily to grasp the progress of the game. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured so that the "special symbol" is not temporarily stopped, but this makes it difficult to grasp the progress of the game with respect to the first decorative symbol, while the entertaining on the effect is made For the second decorative symbol provided to ensure that the progress of the game can be easily grasped, the "special symbol" (ie, when displayed on the effective line, the big hit Although it does not mean, it is because it is configured not to display a symbol which may make it difficult to grasp the progress of the game such as a symbol for announcing that a big hit may occur thereafter. In the case of "non-display" (including both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) described above, it may include the state of fluctuating display at a high speed (the fluctuating state where the afterimage can be seen), In the case of “display” (including both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), it is in a state of fluctuating display at a low speed (in the case of a display mode that fluctuates from top to bottom, slowly from above) And (provisional) fluctuation state going to the planned stop position) may be included.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that a 2nd decoration symbol may not stop temporarily in the middle of a change (and that a "special symbol" does not stop), it is not limited to this but a 2nd decoration symbol is also Similar to the first decorative symbol, it may be configured to be able to temporarily stop in the middle of a fluctuation (and to cause a pseudo fluctuation). That is, in the case of such a configuration, the operation contents of the variable display and the stop display (including the temporary stop) become substantially the same between the entire line of the first decorative symbol and the full line of the second decorative symbol. The types of symbols are different.

  Moreover, it is not necessary to always display the second decorative symbol during the variable display of the main game symbol, and the display condition and the display mode of the second decorative symbol may be changed as appropriate. For example, (1) A specific effect is being generated (instead of making the first decorative symbol invisible, a movie moving image may be reproduced using the entire display area on the effect display device SG, so-called effects (2) at the time of a specific reach effect (the second decoration symbol is displayed in the case where a moveable role product for a game advances to a state of hiding the display area on the effect display device SG) [1] Instead of making the decorative pattern invisible, it is at the time of execution of the reach effect that the big hit expectation increases remarkably, for example, to forcibly stop the display content of the effect performed on the effect display device SG The second decorative symbol is displayed only when the so-called freeze reach effect is performed, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed in the other reach effects (particularly when the reach effect with a low probability of big hit is performed). ) Make the appearance position of the second decorative symbol different on the effect display device SG according to the effect pattern (for example, the above-mentioned effect movable functional object advances to a state of hiding the display area on the effect display device SG In the case of a special effect, move to a display area on the effect display device SG which is not obscured by the movable character for this effect), (4) The first decorative symbol can be moved, reduced or enlarged. On the other hand, movement, reduction, enlargement display can not be performed for the second decorative symbol, or the probability that movement, reduction, enlargement display is performed, the movement width, reduction ratio, enlargement ratio, etc. is more than the first decoration symbol. It may be low.

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of a first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, at step 2302, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on a symbol variation in progress flag within the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2309, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the first appearance variation time management timer SM21t-1 and proceeds to step 2310. Also in the case of No at step 2302, the process proceeds to step 2310.

  Next, in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the symbol variation flag is on or not. In the case of Yes in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the first dressing variation time management timer SM 21t-1 in step 2312. Next, in step 2314, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes the first decoration based on the first appearance variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the variation mode temporarily stored in the appearance display related information temporary storage means SM21b It is determined whether or not the fluctuation start timing of the symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2314, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variation display command of the first decorative symbol in step 2316. And go to step 2330.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2314, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 at step 2318 changes the first dressing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1 and the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the first decorative symbol has been reached based on. In the case of Yes at step 2318, at step 2320, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the graphic display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not it is the stop timing of the above-mentioned "special symbol" In this example, the "special symbol" is configured to temporarily stop only in the middle symbol). In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is in the flag area of the graphic display related information temporary storage means SM21 b, an angel zone flag (for notifying that the big hit expectation is increased The flag (trigger to display the background image) is turned on, and the process shifts to step 2324. On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 2320, the process proceeds to step 2324. Next, in step 2324, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the first decorative symbol (sent to the sub sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) And go to step 2330. In the present embodiment, “Angel zone background” is displayed as a background effect when the angel zone flag is turned on, but as the timing when the angel zone flag is turned on, for example, (1) During pattern variation with relatively high jackpot expectation (for example, symbol variation to be a reach), (2) at the time of symbol variation stop pertaining to reserve of digesting schedule prior to symbol fluctuation with high jackpot expectation. Etc. The details will be described later, but the "special symbol" that triggers the angel zone flag to be on may be temporarily stopped in the case of (1) described above, or in the case of (2) described above You may decide to stop.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2318, at step 2326, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25) controls the first rendering variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. It is determined whether or not the display timing of the advance notice image or the reach image has been reached based on the change mode temporarily stored in (and the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM 25 b). If Yes in step 2326, in step 2328, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25) sets the image display command according to the notice image or the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999) , Transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2330. Also in the case of No at step 2326, the process proceeds to step 2330.

  Next, in step 2330, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the graphic display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the first decorative symbol is normally displayed (the player visually recognizes the first decorative symbol as described above). In the case where it is possible to determine which symbol is stopped as the first decorative symbol, it is determined whether or not the second decorative symbol is not displayed. In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2332, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the second symbol display flag (in the non-display state with respect to the second decorative symbol) in the flag area of the costume display related information temporary storage means SM21b. The flag for switching “on” or “off” or “on” is turned off, and the process moves to step 2336. On the other hand, if No in step 2330, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the second symbol display flag in the flag area of the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21b in step 2334, and shifts to step 2336 .

  Next, in step 2336, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the costume display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, main side information temporary storage means It is determined whether or not information indicating that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed from the main control board M side is received with reference to the SM 11 b). In the case of Yes in step 2336, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (decision display command) of the first decorative symbol in step 2338 (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999 the sub sub control unit SS side Sent to). Next, in step 2340, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the first appearance variation time management timer SM21t-1. Next, in step 2342, the decorative symbol display control means SM 21 turns off the symbol variation flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM 21 b and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2350) Do. Also in the case of No in step 2310 or step 2336, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2350).

  In the present embodiment, the sub main control unit SM manages the timing relating to the variable display of the first decorative symbol, the execution timing of the background effect, and the like by using the first drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1. Although configured, the management method of the timing related to the variation of the first decorative symbol, the execution timing of the background effect, etc. is not limited to this, and temporary stop of the first decorative symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display content determination process of step 2200. The contents such as timing, notice image / reach image display timing, background effect display timing (display switch timing for background effect), etc. are all determined and transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS, and the sub-sub control unit SS follows the received contents. The effect may be executed (displayed) as needed at any time (the same applies to the second decorative symbol).

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of a second decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 in FIG. First, at step 2352, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the first symbol variation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2352, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21 b in step 2354 and determines whether or not the second symbol display flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 2354, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variation display execution command of the second decorative symbol (the command for variably displaying the second decorative symbol) in step 2356 (display command transmission of step 2999 It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the control processing), and the process shifts to step 2360. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2354, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variable display erase command (command for hiding the second decorative symbol) of the second decorative symbol at step 2358 (step 2999). It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control processing), and the process shifts to step 2360.

  Next, in step 2360, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b to determine whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, main side information temporary storage means It is determined whether or not information indicating that the main game symbol is stopped and displayed from the main control board M side is received with reference to the SM 11 b). In the case of Yes in step 2360, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (decision display command) of the second decorative symbol in step 2362 (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub sub control unit SS side Sent to). Next, in step 2364, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol display flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2400). Transition. Also in the case of No in step 2352 or step 2360, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400).

  Here, the lower part of the same figure is a decorative symbol display area image figure. As shown in the figure, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the hold display (the hold for the first main game symbol and the hold for the second main game symbol may be simultaneously displayed) are effect display devices It is configured to be able to be displayed on the SG, and in the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the determined display timing (the timing at which the main gaming symbol is stopped and displayed), etc. Since the first decorative symbol is the main decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol has higher visibility than the second decorative symbol (the displayed area is supposed to be larger). Moreover, in this embodiment, the fluctuation | variation start timing and fluctuation | variation end timing (decision display timing) of a 1st decorative symbol and a 2nd decorative symbol are the same timing.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, at step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the special game in progress flag is off. If Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM 23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM 23 b in step 2406 and step 2408, and the effect display device A big hit start display is performed on the SG (a display is appropriately made based on the type of big hit), and the process shifts to step 2412. Also in the case of No at step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2412.

  Next, in step 2412, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of wins on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (gaming or big hit It may be performed as needed based on the type etc.).

  Next, in step 2413, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying an effect relating to a special game in progress based on the gaming state at the time of winning the corresponding big jack in execution and the jackpot symbol in suspension ( Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) (for example, in the case of the special game related to the latent probability variation big hit symbol, transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the special game is over An effect that the player can not recognize is executed). Next, in step 2414, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 performs a big hit end display on the effect display device SG (displays appropriately based on the type of the big hit). Next, in step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game in progress flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2500). . Also in the case of No in step 2404 or step 2414, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of background rendering control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, at step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the graphic display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the angel zone flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control unit SM 23 sets “angel zone background” (background effect that can be displayed triggered by temporary stop of “special symbol”) as background effect, and step 2506 Migrate to Next, in step 2506, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the change (part of the pseudo continuous change) which triggered the transition of the "angel zone" is ended. Determine if If Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the background effect display control unit SM23 turns off the angel zone flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage unit SM21b. Next, in step 2509, the background effect display control unit SM23 sets a predetermined background effect (for example, sets the background effect set before “angel zone background” is set), and the process proceeds to step 2520. Do.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b at step 2512 to determine whether or not the symbol variation display start instruction command is received from the main side . In step 2512, if Yes, in step 2514, execute a stage shift lottery winning with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/20) (a stage shift lottery will be executed at the start of each fluctuation) . Next, in step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result in step 2514 and determines whether or not the stage transition lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 makes a transition for looping each stage in the order of a predetermined stage transition pattern (for example, flat stage → space stage → volcano stage → flat stage) Background rendering, and proceeds to step 2520. Incidentally, even if the result of the step 2506, the step 2512 or the step 2516 is No, the process shifts to the step 2520.

  Next, in step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying the background effect set on the effect display device SG (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, to the sub sub control unit SS side) It is transmitted, and it transfers to the following process (process of step 2999).

  By configuring as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, two types of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are provided as the decorative symbols, and the first decorative symbol is not displayed (stopped) By configuring the second decorative symbol to be displayed (variable display) in a state where the display / variation display is not displayed) or in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize, the player can always select one of the decorative symbols. The user-friendly game machine can be visually identified and can accurately determine whether or not the stopped symbol, the big hit symbol is stopped, and the like.

(Modification 1 from the present embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous variation is executed, the "special symbol" always stops in the middle temporary stop symbol, and the first display symbol is always displayed during the variation display of the first decorative symbol Although the two decorative symbols are configured to be hidden, the display control method of the decorative symbols is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is set as a first modification of the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 (decorative symbol production table 3, decorative symbol production table 4), a decorative symbol production table SM21 ta-2 (decorative symbol production table 3, in particular, a part of the cases where the result is false, and It is an example of the decorative symbol presentation table 4, in particular, a part of the case where the result is a big hit. The changes from the present embodiment will first be described in detail for the first decorative symbol. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is configured to be displayed even during the change. In addition, for example, at the time of the temporary stop timing of the inside design at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation execution such as “A-6 (loss) pseudo run 2 (the specified appearance eyes)”, the specified appearance is stopped other than the “special symbol”. It is configured to be able to Here, different from the “special symbol”, the specific item is that all rows (left row, middle row, right row) stop with numbers but stop according to a certain rule. (For example, the order is "345" etc.), and it is configured to notify the player that the pseudo continuous fluctuation is being executed by stopping the specific output. Further, in the first modification example from the present embodiment, when false continuous variation is executed, in the case of a loss, the specific outcome is easier to stop than the “special symbol” at the temporary stop timing of the middle row. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, the "special symbol" is easier to stop than the specific outcome at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, that is, "special symbol" than when the specific outcome is stopped. In the case of a stop, there is a higher expectation for a big hit. In addition, it is not limited to this, and even if it comprises so that the degree of expectation which becomes a big hit will become higher in the case where a specific outcome stops rather than the case where a "special symbol" stops, there is no problem at all. In addition, when the pseudo variation is executed in the pseudo continuous variation, all the symbols re-variate, that is, the three symbols re-variate after the three symbols temporarily stop, but in such a case , When the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped in the middle row and then the middle row re-variates, the decorative symbol in the middle row at the start of the re-variation is not the "special symbol" {eg, "6 ★ 7 "(★ = special symbol), it temporarily changes in the state of" 667 "when it is temporarily stopped (the middle symbol is preferably the symbol of" ± 1 "frame of the right symbol or the left symbol)}} It may be configured as follows.

  Next, changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail for the second decorative symbol. In the first modification from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured to be displayed at all times during the change of the main gaming symbol. In the case of reach, the second decorative symbol is also temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol is also determined and displayed simultaneously at the finalized display timing of the first decorative symbol. (The same symbol will be displayed stopped by the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). In addition, the variation display mode of the second decorative symbol is not limited to this. For example, the first decorative symbol can be visually recognized, and the player can easily grasp the progress of the game by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol. In the case of becoming, the second decorative symbol is not displayed, that is, while the first decorative symbol is variably displayed, the temporary drop is stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row during temporary stop of the left row and right row If the second decorative symbol is not displayed while the second decorative symbol is not displayed, if the "special symbol" is stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row, the second decorative symbol is variably displayed (or provisionally displayed). It may be configured to be a stop display). Further, all the second decorative symbols may be stopped and temporarily stopped according to the stop and the temporary stop of the first decorative symbol. Further, the second decorative symbol may be configured to be constantly displayed in a variable display regardless of the fluctuation state of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol may also be determined and stopped only when the first decorative symbol is determined and stopped.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the present embodiment, the pseudo continuous variation is realized by configuring that the specified number can be temporarily stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row. A plurality of types of stop modes at the time of temporary stop can be provided at the time of execution, and the player pays attention to which stop mode it is by making the expectation for becoming a big hit different by the stop mode. Thus, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In the first modification of the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first decorative symbol may be displayed during the execution of a specific effect such as reach effect. May not be displayed in a variable manner (not displayed), or only a specific row (for example, a middle row) may be displayed.

  In addition, in the modification 1 from this embodiment, although it comprised so that specific appearance eyes (or "special symbol") could stop temporarily at the temporary stop timing of middle row, specific appearance eyes (or "special symbol") The display mode etc. of the left column and the right column when the) is displayed may be changed, for example, (1) with the left column and the right column as the same number, the middle column as ± 1 of the same number. (For example, “special symbol” is placed at “4 · 5 · 4” or 5 positions in the middle row), (2) in the same stop mode as the missing eye which is not a specified result There is a notification that the specific eye is a change in the sound and color, (3) temporarily stop all the columns simultaneously, (4) numbers in the left and / or right columns at the temporary stop timing of the middle row (5) If the decorative patterns in the left and right columns are numbers separated by "2 or more", the decorative pattern in the middle is left And / or right columns and the case was temporarily stopped at a loss in the "2" or more away from the numbers, it may be used as such. In addition, the appearance condition of the specific outcome may also be changed, for example, it is easy to appear when the temporary stop symbols (numbers) in the left and right rows are identical (or appear only when they are identical) For example, it may be configured to be different from the appearance condition of the "special symbol". In addition, if the “special symbol” (or specified eye) appears after reach, the jackpot expectation is higher than the case where the “special symbol” (or specified eye) appears if it is not a reach, or After that, there is a high possibility that “special symbol” will temporarily stop again during the symbol variation concerned {For example, “7 ★ 7” has a higher probability of big hit than “7 ★ 8” (★ = special symbol), Alternatively, it may be configured to have a high possibility of temporary stop again.

(Modification 2 from the present embodiment)
Here, although the configuration of the display mode of the first decorative symbol at the time of pseudo continuous variation has been mentioned in the present embodiment and the first modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol at the time of pseudo continuous variation other than the configuration is described. New play can be created with the configuration of the display mode. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is set as a second modification of the present embodiment, and only the changes to the first modification of the present embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 (decorative symbol production table 5, decorative symbol production table 6), decorative symbol production table SM21 ta-2 (decorative symbol production table 5, in particular, a part of the cases where the result is false, and It is an example of the decorative symbol presentation table 6, especially, a part of the case where the result of the success or failure is a big hit. First, the first decorative symbol will be described in detail with respect to a modification of the first modification from the present embodiment. In the second modification from the present embodiment, the "special symbol" which is displayed while the first decorative symbol is being changed and can be stopped at the temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous variation is "special symbol A" and "special symbol A". Two types of special symbol B "are provided. Here, "special symbol A" is configured to be able to temporarily stop from the first temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (also after the timing), while "special symbol B" is pseudo continuous It is comprised so that it can stop temporarily from the 2nd middle row temporary stop timing in a fluctuation | variation. In addition, the specific result is configured to be able to temporarily stop from the first temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation (even after the timing). That is, at the first temporary stop timing of the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation, as a stop mode, two types of “special symbol A” and a specific outcome may temporarily stop, while the second middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation In the temporary stop timing of, as a stop mode, it is constituted so that "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" and three kinds of specific outcome can be temporarily stopped, and the first middle row in pseudo continuous variation is configured There are more types of stop modes that can be stopped at the second temporary stop timing in the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation than the temporary stop timing. As described above, in the temporary stop timing in the middle row of the pseudo continuous variation, the types of stop modes may be increased as the second half temporary stop timings become, or the types of the stop modes may be set as the second temporary stop timings. May be configured to be reduced. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the types of stop modes increase in the latter half of the temporary stop timing, the stop modes have a high expectation that the change becomes a big hit as the type of selection candidate each time the pseudo change is executed. It may be configured to be newly added, and with such configuration, the player will pay attention each time the pseudo fluctuation is executed. Further, in the case of a configuration in which the type of the stop mode decreases as the temporary stop timing in the second half is reached, the stop mode having a low degree of expectation that the change becomes a big hit as the type of selection candidate every time the pseudo change is executed It may be configured to be deleted, and by configuring in such a way, it is possible to secure the expectation that the variation becomes a big hit each time the pseudo variation is executed. In addition, about a 2nd decorative symbol, since it is the structure similar to the example 1 of a change from this embodiment, description is omitted.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the present embodiment, the temporary stop timing may be temporarily stopped as the second half of the temporary stop timing at the middle row in the pseudo continuous fluctuation. By configuring so as to increase the number of stop modes, the player pays attention to the number of times the middle row temporarily stops and the stop mode at the time of the temporary stop, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

(Modification 3 from the present embodiment)
Here, in the present embodiment, two types of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are provided as the decorative symbols, and the first decorative symbol is not displayed (a state in which the stop display / variation display is not displayed) Although the second decorative symbol is displayed (variable display) in a state or in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, the configuration using the second decorative symbol is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is set as a third modification of the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in the third modification example from the present embodiment. The changes from the present embodiment are steps 2232 (mod 3) to 2236 (mod 3), steps 2900 (mod 3), steps 2246 (mod 3) and steps 2248 (mod 3), that is, step 2204. Then, after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag, in step 2232 (3), the figure display content determination means SM21 n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b, and the current gaming state is the probability fluctuation gaming state It is determined whether the In the case of Yes in step 2232 (modification), in the step 2234 (modification), the figure display content determining means SM21 n causes the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol to be a probability change display mode (during probability fluctuation gaming state) Is determined to be the display pattern of the decorative symbol to be displayed on the screen, and the process shifts to step 2900 (mod. 3). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2232 (v. 3), at step 2236 (v. 3), the graphic display content determining means SM 21 n displays the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol The display mode of the decorative symbol to be displayed during the non-probability fluctuation gaming state is determined, and the process shifts to step 2900 (modification 3). Thus, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the display modes of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to be different depending on whether or not they are in the probability variation gaming state, and the first decoration When the display mode of the symbol changes (for example, when transitioning from the non-probability fluctuation gaming state to the probability fluctuation gaming state), the display mode of the second decorative symbol is also changed along with the change. In addition, the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is not limited to the configuration different only depending on whether or not it is the probability variation gaming state, for example, whether it is the time shortening gaming state, background It may be configured to differ depending on which effect (render stage) is used.

  Next, in step 2900 (modification 3), the clothing display content determination means SM21n executes a painting stop symbol determination process, which will be described later. Next, in step 2246 (modification 3), the figure display content determination means SM21 n determines the variation mode of the first decorative symbol based on the information on the variation mode of the main game symbol. Next, in step 2248 (modification 3), the figure display content determination means SM21 n determines the variation mode of the second decorative symbol based on the information on the variation mode of the main gaming symbol, and proceeds to step 2216.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of drawing stop symbol determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2900 (modification 3) in FIG. 31 in the third modification example from the present embodiment. First, in step 2902, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol related to the symbol variation is a big hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 2902, the drawing display content determination means SM21 n refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11 b in step 2904, and the number of rounds executed in the special game relating to the jackpot symbol is the maximum number of rounds In this example, it is determined whether or not 16R). In the case of Yes in step 2904, in step 2906, the arrangement display content determination means SM21 n arranges the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in a set of three "white" symbols (for example, "777") Determined to be one of the three sets of "black" symbols (for example, "444") (The total distribution ratio with three sets of "white" symbols selected and three sets of "black" symbols Is made 1: 1 with the total distribution ratio to be selected), and the processing proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 2246 (variable 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2904, in step 2908, the arrangement display content determination means SM21n arranges the stop symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in three "black" symbols (for example, "444") Then, the processing proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 2246 (modification 3)}. Thus, in the third modified example from the present embodiment, in the case of a special game in which three sets of "white" symbols (for example, "777") are the maximum number of rounds (in this example, 16R). Can be stopped only, that is, when three sets of white symbols are stopped, it is configured that it is almost deterministic that the special game of the maximum number of rounds (in this example, 16R) is executed. (It may be a relatively high profit for the player than three sets of "black" symbols).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2902, the dressed display content determination means SM1 n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the information on the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol in step 2910. Next, in step 2912, the drawing display content determination means SM21n sets the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol to a predetermined lost symbol ("345" in this example, and the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol is only one pattern). And the process proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 2246 (variable 3)}. In addition, although the kind of stop pattern of a 2nd decorative symbol may not be only one pattern, it is desirable that there are fewer than the kind of stop symbol of a 1st decorative symbol. Moreover, the stop symbol at the time of the loss of the second decorative symbol is a predetermined lost symbol (in this example, "345"), while the stop symbol at the loss of the first decorative symbol is selected from a plurality of candidates (For example, it is randomly selected from among 300 types of stop symbol candidates), so the frequency at which the predetermined lost symbol stops at the time of the loss is higher in the second decorative symbol than in the first decorative symbol ( As a stop symbol of the first decorative symbol, a predetermined missing symbol may not be stopped. In addition, all possible lost symbols of the second decorative symbol (for example, only one pattern of "375" may be used) is the highest for the player in any game state when three identical symbols are aligned. It may be configured such that one or more symbols (eg, “7” symbols) to be profitable are always included (eg, “375” and “276” may stop).

  Next, FIG. 33 is an image diagram according to the display mode of the decorative symbol in the third modification example from the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are used depending on whether the gaming state is the non-probability fluctuation gaming state or the probability fluctuation gaming state. The display modes (in this example, display colors and display attributes such as color arrangement pattern, shape, size, etc.) may be configured to be different. Specifically, in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, only the "7" symbol is displayed as "whiteout" along with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and all symbols other than "7" are " "Black" is displayed (it becomes non-probability change display mode), while it is a probability fluctuation gaming state, "3" design and "7" with the 1st decoration pattern and the 2nd decoration pattern The symbol is displayed as "white", and all symbols other than "3" and "7" are displayed as "black". That is, together with the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the "3" symbol is configured to be different in display mode depending on the game state (become a probability change display mode). The condition that the display mode is different is not limited to whether or not it is the probability variation gaming state, and it may be set whether or not it is the time shortening gaming state, and it differs depending on which background effect (rendering stage) is being executed. It may be configured to be possible. In addition, in the example 3 of change from this embodiment, although the symbol whose display attribute can be changed depending on whether or not it is the probability variation gaming state is the “3” symbol, the “3” symbol is the same as described above. It is included in the combination of the predetermined lost symbol (in this example, "345") that will stop the second decorative symbol at the time of the lost (in the left row is the stopped symbol), in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state The stop symbol of the second decorative symbol at the time of the loss is displayed in "black", while in the probability variation gaming state, the stop symbol of the second decorative symbol at the loss is "whiteout" from the left row , "Black", "black" will be displayed.

  Next, FIG. 34 and FIG. 35 (decorative symbol production table 7, decorative symbol production table 8) are portions of the decorative symbol presentation table SM21 ta-2 (decorative symbol production table 7, particularly when the result of the acceptance is lost) And, it is an example of the decorative symbol presentation table 8, in particular, a part of the case where the result of the success or failure is a big hit. The point of change from the present embodiment is that the item of the decorative symbol type is the display update type, and three items of “first decorative symbol”, “second decorative symbol” and “transmissive liquid crystal” are provided, In the third modification example from the present embodiment, the J-display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is configured to be able to execute the transmission effect that is to be transmitted, and the first decoration is performed while the transmission effect is being performed. The symbol is not displayed but the second decorative symbol is displayed (see "33 seconds" of the display update timing).

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 18 in the third modification example from the present embodiment. The point of change from this embodiment is step 2327-1 (v3) and step 2327-2 (v3), that is, step 2327 when the preview image or reach image display timing is reached in step 2326. In 1 (modification), the notice effect display control unit SM24 performs the transmission effect (production according to the first drawing change time management timer SM21t-1 and the change mode temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage unit SM24b. It is determined whether or not it is an execution timing of the effect that the display area SG10 of the display device SG passes through. In the case of Yes in step 2327-1 (v3), in step 2327-2 (v3), the notice effect display control means SM24 sets an image display command related to the transmission effect (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) And transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to step 2336. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2327-1 (variation 3), the process moves to step 2328. In addition, when the transmission effect is executed, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is transmitted, and it becomes possible to visually recognize the state in which the character in the effect display device SG is driven, and the first decorative symbol Is erased (not displayed), and the second decorative symbol is continuously displayed by the second decorative symbol display device in the effect display device SG (details will be described later). Further, in the third modification example from the present embodiment, the number-of-holds display area is provided adjacent to the display of the second decorative symbol of the effect display device SG (right direction as viewed from the player). By this configuration, the player can visually recognize the number of reservations even during the transparent effect execution.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart of special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. 18 in the third modification from the present embodiment. The point of change from this embodiment is step 2410 (variation 3), that is, after setting the command related to the jackpot display in step 2408, or when the special game flag is on, step 2410 In the variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command to continuously display (for example, “777” continues to stop) the second decorative symbol from the time of stopping the big hit symbol pertaining to the special game (step) In the display command transmission control process of 2999, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side, and the process proceeds to step 2412. As described above, in the third modification from the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed even during the special game, and the player is allowed to select which decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol). Whether or not the special game is being executed can be determined even during the special game.

  Next, FIG. 38 is an image diagram according to the configuration of the effect display device in the third modification example from the present embodiment. First, as shown in the conceptual perspective view and the conceptual top view of the effect display device, the second decorative symbol display device is provided on the back side (as viewed from the player) from the display area SG10, and the device emits light ( By the light being output in the direction of the display area SG10), the second decorative symbol and the number-of-holds display area are displayed in the display area SG10. Moreover, although it becomes possible to display an effect in the display area SG10 by outputting light from the light source, the effect is not displayed in the area adjacent to the second decorative symbol display device in the display area SG10. The second decorative symbol display device is configured to be able to visually recognize the display of the second decorative symbol and the number-of-retentions display area by the two decorative symbol display device. In addition, when the transmission effect is executed, the effect in the display area SG10 is not displayed, and it is configured that visual effects in the effect display device SG can be viewed. In addition, since the effect display in the second decorative symbol display device is being executed even during the transparent effect, it is possible for the player to visually recognize. By configuring in this manner, the player can recognize the variation status and the number of reservations of the decorative symbol by visually recognizing the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device even in the situation where the transparent effect is being executed. Become. In addition, the display of the said holding number may differ the kind of holding displayed according to gaming state (For example, in the non-time shortening gaming state, the 1st main game pending number is displayed, and in the time shortening gaming state, The second main game hold number may be displayed), the first main game hold number and the second main game hold number may always be displayed, or the total of the first main game hold number and the second main game hold number. It may be configured to display the number of pending calls. The configuration for displaying the effect in the display area SG10 is not limited to this, as long as the display area SG10 is configured to be switched between the transmissive state and the non-transmissive state, for example, the position of the light source is changed. A light guide plate (a transmissive plate member that scatters light emitted from a light emitting element incident from a side surface in the vertical direction); A display area (so-called edge light type) for displaying via the display, a display area made of an organic EL, or the like may be used. In addition, as a configuration example using a light guide plate, viewed from the player side, “transmissive liquid crystal (liquid crystal shutter)” and “light guide plate {disposed close to transmissive liquid crystal (approximately 5 mm)” from the front side; Light source A for distributing light to the light guide plate is disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the light source}, “a light source B constantly outputting light at the lower left of the display area SG10”, Light source C for emphasizing objects and showing them to the player, and when performing transmission effect (when emphasizing features to show the player), the output of the light source A is turned off (light source The output of A may be reduced as compared to the non-execution of transmission effect, and the outputs of the light source B and the light source C are turned ON, and the transmission effect is not performed (the player does not want to show the character to the player, When it is desired to show the player the effect in the display area SG10), the light source A and ON the output of the source B, and outputs the OFF of the light source C (output of the light source C also may as an output lower than the transmissive demonstration execution) may be configured to. In addition, the display of the second decorative symbol and the number-of-retentions display area is not limited to the configuration of this example, and for example, the second decorative symbol display device emits light (light is output in the direction of the display area SG10) The second decorative symbol and the number-of-holds display area can be displayed on the display area SG10 by the same mechanism as the mechanism for displaying effects by outputting light from the light source toward the display area SG10, ie, When the second decorative symbol display device substitutes for the light source, even if the transmission effect is executed and the light source does not output light, the second decorative symbol display device always outputs light, 2 The display of the decoration symbol and the number-of-retentions display area may be configured to be always visible (the light guide plate is used to prevent transmission of the transmissive liquid crystal).

  Next, FIG. 39 is an illustration of transmission effect execution in a third modification example from the present embodiment. In the present example, in the normal gaming state (non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state), the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed twice (the fluctuation of the pseudo ream 2) one time the symbol fluctuation is executed Case is illustrated. First, the fluctuation of a certain decorative symbol (a first decorative symbol and a second decorative symbol) is started, and then the special symbol is temporarily stopped as a first middle row temporary stop symbol. Thereafter, the fluctuation of a certain decorative symbol (first and second decorative symbols) is started again, and then the special symbol is temporarily stopped again as a second middle temporary stop symbol. Thereafter, the variation of a certain decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) is started again, and the display area SG10 is in the transmission state due to the transmission effect being performed, and the back of the display area SG10 (game It is possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the character that is in (the player) is driving. After that, the transmission effect ends (the display area SG10 is in the non-transmission state), and the features in the back of the display area SG10 (as viewed from the player) become invisible and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed again. It becomes visible (displayed). After that, in the case of a loss, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at the missing symbol {the second decorative symbol stops at the predetermined missing symbol ("345"), and the first decorative symbol It is a combination of stop symbols that may differ from the lost symbol ("787"). In the case of a big hit, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol stop at the big hit symbol {the big hit symbol of the first decorative symbol and the big hit symbol of the second decorative symbol are the same combination of stop symbols and It has become}. Thereafter, the special game is executed, and the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed stopped with the same jackpot symbol as the start of the special game even during the execution of the special game. In addition, even during the special game, the transparent effect may be executed (the display area SG10 may be in the transparent state), for example, in the effect of notifying whether or not the probability change gaming state will be entered after the special game is over. By configuring to be able to execute the transparent effect immediately before the execution, by visually recognizing the transparent effect, the player can increase the expectation of shifting to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is over. In addition, even if the transparent effect is executed during special game execution, the display of the second decorative symbol and the number-of-helds display area is maintained (because it becomes visible), it does not hinder the progress of the game. It is configured as follows. As a display example of a decorative symbol in a special game, for example, in order to inform the player which decorative symbol has become a big hit by arranging three in a special game, only one symbol that has been aligned is displayed. (For example, if “77” is a big hit, “7” is displayed), and when the transparent effect is performed, the display of the aligned symbols becomes invisible. May be configured to maintain the display of the second decorative symbol and the number-of-holds display area even during a special game in order to make the second character recognizable.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the third modification from the present embodiment, the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG is in the transmission state, and transmission of which features in the effect display device SG are visible. Since the effect display on the second decorative symbol display device is executed even if the first decorative symbol is not displayed during execution of the transparent effect, the player can select the second decorative symbol. By visually recognizing the effect display on the display device, it is possible to recognize the fluctuation state of the decorative symbol and the number of reservations, and it is possible to make the gaming machine more user-friendly. In addition, the game state transition distribution rate after the special game end concerning the first main game start opening A10 entering the game and the game state transition distribution after the special game end concerning the second main game start opening B10 entrance into the game The display attribute of the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) can be different depending on whether or not the probability changing gaming state is made while making the rate different, and it is possible to suggest or notify the player that it is a high profit The game ball to the second main game start opening B10 than the non-probability variation gaming state where the game ball is made to enter the first main game start opening A10 and advance the game by making the number of types of symbols different The probability change gaming state that will enter the ball and proceed with the game has more kinds of display attribute of the big hit symbol that the transition to the probability change gaming state becomes almost definite after the special game is over, now Whether the gaming state of the game is a high profit for the player And thus capable of appropriately suggest or notifiable configured for player a.

  In addition, in the third modification from the present embodiment, any variation of the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol corresponds to the current gaming state or the effect display mode (background effect, etc.) The decorative symbol of the display attribute is variably displayed, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the first main gaming symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation of the second main gaming symbol are common display (and display attribute) (The first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol do not differentiate the display attribute and the display area of the decorative symbol).

Second Embodiment
Here, in the present embodiment, two types of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are provided as the decorative symbol so that the result of symbol variation can be accurately recognized. Can also be applied to a configuration in which Therefore, an example of such a configuration will be referred to as a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. The difference between this embodiment and the present embodiment is step 1322 (second) to step 1344 (second), and the purpose thereof is to subdivide variation mode random number delimiter information, which is information to be referred to when determining the pre-reading effect contents. That is, after storing the first main game content determination random number in step 1308, in step 1322 (second), the hold control unit MJ30 sets the flag of the special game related information temporary storage unit MB20b. Referring to the area, it is determined whether the special game execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1322 (second), in step 1324 (second), the hold control means MJ 30 is in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30 b, and the main game time short flag is off or not. Determine if In the case of Yes in step 1324 (the second), in step 1326 (the second), the suspension control means MJ 30 is based on the suspension information (the lottery random number and the symbol determination random number), the result and the symbol Determine in advance. Next, in step 1328 (second), the holding control means MJ30 transmits a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting the command related to the newly generated holding success / failure result and the stop symbol information to the sub main control unit SM. (Sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999).

  Next, in step 1330 (second), the suspension control means MJ 30 determines in advance the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group related to the stored suspension based on the suspension information (random number for variation mode determination) With regard to the aspect random number division information and the variation aspect group, refer to the main game table 3 of FIG. 41 and FIG. 42), and shift to step 1332 (second). Also in the case of No at step 1322 (second) or step 1324 (second), the process moves to step 1332 (second). In the second embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). Next, in step 1332 (the second), the hold control means MJ 30 sub-commands a new hold generation command (a hold generation command of the first main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode random number division information, etc.) The command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control unit SM is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1312. In addition, when it is comprised so that symbol information may be transmitted to a sub side like 2nd Embodiment, the production which suggests a big hit may be performed as a production performed by a sub side, and when it is set as such composition It is preferable that the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol to be the big hit be notified to the player (the stop symbol is notified only when the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol is a big hit).

  Thus, in the second embodiment, when the main game content determination random number (the first main game content determination random number or the second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when the hold occurs) the fluctuation mode random number division information and the fluctuation mode It is configured to determine a group.

  It should be noted that the main game content determination random number information, the pass / fail random number delimiter information, the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group information may be transmitted to the sub side at the timing when the hold occurs, but further, the sub side Information to be sent to is not limited to this, information related to the stop symbol of the main game symbol, information related to the profit mode of the main game symbol to be a big hit (number of rounds of special games according to the main game symbol to be stopped, etc. ), The number of reservations immediately after the holding winnings (only the number of holdings on the first main gaming side or the second main gaming side that has won the prize, or the number of holdings on both the first main gaming side and the second main gaming side may be used) May be configured to be able to transmit information pertaining to, etc. {Convenient random number division information refers to the respective gaming states on the first main game side (second main game side) and random value (or random value range) And the success and failure lottery results, and grouping It is one of the random number division information, for example, a probability change gaming state, a non-probability change gaming state, a loss, a probability change gaming state or a non-probability change gaming state, hit, probability If it is a fluctuation gaming state, it is a hit, but if it is a non-probability fluctuation gaming state, a grouping such as a loss can be mentioned}.

  Next, in step 1318, after storing the second main game content determination random number, in step 1334 (second), the suspension control means MJ 30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB 20b, and performs special game It is determined whether the execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1334 (the second), in step 1338 (the second), the suspension control means MJ 30 is based on the suspension information (the lottery random number and the symbol determination random number), the result and the symbol Determine in advance. Next, in step 1340 (second), the hold control means MJ 30 transmits a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting a command related to the newly generated hold success / failure result and stop symbol information to the sub main control unit SM. (Sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1999).

  Next, in step 1342 (second), the suspension control means MJ 30 predetermines the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group related to the stored suspension based on the suspension information (random number for variation mode determination) With regard to the aspect random number division information and the variation aspect group, refer to the main game table 3 of FIG. 32, FIG. 33), and shift to step 1344 (second). Next, in step 1344 (the second), the hold control means MJ 30 sub-commands a new hold generation command (the hold generation command of the second main game content determination random number, the command concerning the variation mode random number division information, etc.) Set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the main control unit SM (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999), and shift to the next processing (processing of step 1400) .

  On the other hand, if No in step 1334 (second), in step 1336 (second), the hold control means MJ30 is in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the main game time short flag is off. It is determined whether or not. If Yes in step 1336 (second), the process moves to step 1344 (second). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1336 (second), the process proceeds to step 1338 (second).

  Incidentally, although storage of the first main game content determination random number and storage of the second main game content determination random number are executed in steps 1308 and 1318, the main game content determination random number is stored in the storage area of the RAM of the main control board. In the case of storing a memory, a dedicated storage area is secured, and only information related to the "main game content determination random number" is stored in the byte storing the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers It is preferable to configure so as not to store other information such as a value (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, the information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise etc. To prevent it). In addition, with regard to the lottery random number, the change in the gaming state (the gaming state relating to the suspension recorded already) is obtained during the period from when the lottery random number is obtained to when the lottery Not only the change but also a change in the gaming state may occur due to the newly generated suspension, so the gaming state at the time of the execution of the lottery for the lottery random number may be unpredictable. It is comprised so that the said lottery random number may be memorize | stored until it performs. In the second embodiment, in the non-time shortening gaming state, the command to the sub main control unit SM related to the information on holding can be transmitted only at the time of holding occurrence according to the first main game, while the time shortening gaming state In the case of the second main game, it is possible to transmit only at the hold occurrence according to the second main game, but regardless of which gaming state is the first main game with hold or the second main game with hold Alternatively, the command may be transmitted, and in such a case, the sub main control unit SM may be configured to determine whether to use the received command. In addition, a specific example of the command related to the pass / fail result information to be sent to the sub main control unit SM is “D000H: Missing, D001H: Missing with low confidence, Hit with high confidence, D002H: Hit with both low confidence and high probability” Yes, specific examples of commands related to stop symbol information to be sent to the sub main control unit SM are "D100H: hit 16R probability variation, D101H: 16R non probability variation hit, D102H: 2R probability variation hit", to the sub main control unit SM A specific example of the command related to the variation mode random number division information to be transmitted is “D200H: division 1, D201H: division 2, D202H: division 3”.

  Next, FIGS. 41 and 42 (main game table 3) are the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) in the second embodiment. An example of The difference from the present embodiment is that the variation mode group and the variation mode random number delimiter information are provided, that is, in the second embodiment, the variation mode with respect to a certain random value (or random value range). The random number division information is configured to be determined, and the number of fluctuation mode groups (the number of divided random numbers) and the fluctuation time and the random number value range of the fluctuation mode groups differ according to the gaming state and the result of the lottery. Even if it is the same group 1, the range of random number values may be different), and by transmitting the variation mode random number division information to the sub side, the variation mode group according to these gaming states is the sub side It is configured to be able to be derived at That is, when the gaming state transitions between the occurrence of the hold and the conclusion of the hold, the variation mode group scheduled at the occurrence of the hold may differ from the variation mode group executed at the conclusion of the hold. (For example, the fluctuation mode group was scheduled to become group 1 because the non-time shortening gaming state occurs at the time of occurrence of holding, but the actual fluctuation mode group becomes group 2 because the time shortening gaming state is reached at the conclusion of holding). As for fluctuation mode random number division information in which a common fluctuation mode group is assigned across all gaming states, the variation mode random number division information is received by the sub-side (following game states) It is possible to properly execute so-called pending pre-reading effect without considering the transition). Moreover, the variation mode random number division information in FIG. 32 and FIG. 33 is a variation on the first main game side or a variation on the second main game side, or is a hit / off result is a hit or a loss, or the game Although it was configured to form different variation mode random number division information depending on whether the state is the time shortening gaming state or the non-time shortening gaming state, it is not limited to this, is it a variation of the first main game side One variation mode random number division including whether it is a change of the 2nd main game side, a success / fall lottery result is a hit or a loss, or a game state is a time shortening gaming state or a non-time shortening gaming state It may be configured to form information. In addition, in order to cause the second main game hold during the fluctuation of the first main gaming symbol in the time shortening gaming state is irregular symbol fluctuation, according to the first main gaming symbol according to the loss of the time shortening gaming state The contents of the fluctuation mode determination table may be configured such that a short time fluctuation mode is not selected regardless of the number of reservations (e.g., all have a fluctuation time of 5 seconds or more). The number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of first main game holding and second main game holding, but in the case of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the first main It is the number of game holdings, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, the second main game holding number.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a main flowchart of the sub control substrate S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is the step 2003 (second), that is, after the initial process is performed in the step 2002, the sub main control unit SM in the step 2003 (second) Based on the information received from the control board M side, the number of reservations (for example, the drawing suspension counter value) is restored. In addition, the information related to the rendering or the pre-reading effect being executed is not restored (and the information related to the content of the hold is not retransmitted from the main side), and the "under preparation" screen is displayed until the start of the next fluctuation. . By configuring in this way, when a power failure occurs when the background effect to be described later is “Angel zone background”, the information stored on the sub side is lost. After the return of, there is no information indicating that the trigger is on hold, and the background rendering is changed from "Angel zone background" to other background rendering (background rendering such as a flat stage etc. described later). As a result, when there is a conflict between the hold information stored on the main side and the hold information stored on the sub side due to a power failure (for example, due to a power failure or noise upon power failure recovery) Also, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the zone effect of high expectation is executed on the sub side while the main expectation is fluctuating with low expectation. In addition, the process after the restoration of the power interruption is not limited to this, and even after the restoration of the power interruption, the information to the effect of the trigger suspension stored immediately before the occurrence of the power interruption is restored as background effect The angel zone background may be configured to be maintained. In such a configuration, for example, a save area where information can be maintained even during power failure is provided on the sub side, and information related to effects is backed up to the save area when a power failure occurs, and power failure recovery It may be configured to restore the information backed up from time to time. In addition, it is configured to receive information related to the content of the hold from the main side again at the time of power failure recovery, at the start of fluctuation, at the time of fluctuation stop, and at the time of hold occurrence (also regarding hold other than the hold newly generated). Although it is preferable {not shown in this example, the main side transmits only the information related to the number of reservations (the information related to the content of the suspension is not transmitted) at the time of power failure recovery. . Therefore, the information related to the hold existing at the time of the power interruption does not exist after the restoration of the power interruption, so that the pre-reading effect can not be executed for the holding (note that the main side holds the hold Information to be received, and may be configured to be able to execute pre-reading effect for the hold). In addition, when a power failure occurs during the change of the decorative symbol (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol), if the function at the time of the power failure does not have the function to maintain the information, the change from the main side Until the end command of is received, a dark screen (for example, a screen displaying "in preparation" etc.) is displayed}. In the second embodiment, switching background rendering to display “angel zone background” as background rendering may be described as transitioning to “angel zone”.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of pending information management processing according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2120 (second) to step 2128 (second), step 2550 (second), step 2600 (second) and step 2650 (second), that is, step 2104. Then, after adding 1 to the drawing reservation counter, in step 2120 (second), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 is the new hold success / failure result and stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side. Is temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2122 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 holds the hold information (in particular, the fluctuation mode group, the fluctuation mode random number delimiter information) based on the hold generation command transmitted from the main control board M side. , Etc.) are temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM 22 b. In addition, in the case where the information concerning the stop result, the stop pattern, the fluctuation mode group, the fluctuation mode random number division information is not transmitted from the main side in step 2120 (second) or step 2122 (second), The information is not temporarily stored in the pending information temporary storage area. Next, in step 2124 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether the new hold is a hold on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2124 (second), in step 2550 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes the first main game winning combination predetermination processing to be described later, and step 2126 (second) Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2124 (second), in step 2600 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes second main game winning combination pre-read determination processing described later, step 2126 (first Move to 2).

  Next, in step 2126 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b, and does it have information indicating that the new hold is a trigger hold? It is determined whether or not it is determined (information indicating that the trigger is on hold is added in step 2576 or step 2622). If Yes in step 2126 (second), in step 2650 (second), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes prefetch holding content determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 2118. On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 2126 (second), the process proceeds to step 2118.

  On the other hand, after subtracting 1 from the drawing reservation counter in step 2112, in step 2128 (second), the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 holds information relating to the symbol variation (in particular, pass / fail result, stop symbol information, The variation mode group and variation mode random number delimiter information) are deleted from the drawing suspension information temporary storage means SM22b, and the remaining suspension information is shifted, and the process shifts to step 2116.

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flow chart of first main game winning combination pre-reading determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) in FIG. The present processing is divided into two, processing pertaining to the prohibition condition of the pre-reading lottery and processing pertaining to the pre-drawing lottery. In the prohibition process of the former prefetch lottery, first, at step 2552, the reserve prefetch effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22b and holds the second main game hold (the first main game hold) It is determined whether or not there is a hold) which is prioritized prior to the game player. In the case of Yes in step 2552, in step 2554, the holding pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storing means SM11 b and judges whether the current gaming state is not the time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2554, in step 2558, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b and there is a pending with information indicating that the trigger is on pending within the pending It is determined whether there is any. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that has been won in the prize pre-selection lottery (the first main game prize pre-selection lottery, the second main game pre-selection lottery). In the case of Yes in step 2558, in step 2560, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b, and there is no pending which is a big hit in the pending before the new pending. Determine if In the case of Yes in step 2560, the process moves to step 2562.

  Next, in the process relating to the latter pre-reading lottery, first, in step 2562, the pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b, and the new pending becomes a big hit pending It is determined whether the In the case of Yes in step 2562, in step 2564, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k executes a prize pre-selection lottery at the time of winning with a predetermined probability (in this example, 1/3) with respect to the new reserve. It transfers to step 2574. On the other hand, if the result of step 2562 is No, the pre-reading effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b at step 2568, and the change mode group of the new hold is group 3 or not. Determine if As described above, in the second embodiment, in the case where it is determined whether or not the prefetch lottery is executable, it is configured to determine whether or not the prefetch lottery is executable in consideration of the variation mode group. In addition, when determining whether or not execution of the prefetch lottery is performed, it may be configured to determine whether or not the execution of the prefetch lottery is performed in consideration of the variation mode random number delimiter information. In the case of Yes in step 2568, in step 2570, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k executes a prize-prediction lottery at the time of winning with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example) with respect to the new reserve It transfers to step 2574. On the other hand, if No in step 2568, the process also proceeds to step 2574.

  Next, at step 2574, the pending look-ahead rendering execution availability determination means SM 26k determines whether or not the winning at the time of the prize-based reading lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2574, in step 2576, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k is “trigger pending” in the new pending winning in the prize pre-reading lottery in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b Information to the effect is added and temporarily stored, and the processing proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 2126 (second processing)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2552 (when the second main game hold exists in hold), at step 2578, the hold prefetching effect executability judging means SM26k is temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information to the effect that it is "trigger pending" from the information related to the stored pending (If there is no pending with the information that the trigger is pending, this process is not executed, and the next process is not performed. And the next process {the process of step 2126 (second process)}. Also in the case of No at Step 2554, Step 2558, Step 2560, or Step 2574, the process proceeds to the next process {Step 2126 (second process)}. In the process of step 2578, when the second main game side is held (occurred), in the second main game side priority digest game machine such as the second embodiment, the newly generated second game In order to settle the reserve of the main game side first, it is a configuration for avoiding a situation in which the scheduled change order is not reached, and the pre-reading effect across multiple changes is not properly executed. In addition, as a prohibition condition of the pre-reading lottery, a condition as to whether or not there is a suspension of a specific variation mode group (or a suspension of specific variation mode random number delimiter information) in the suspension before the new suspension as a suspension condition It is also good.

  Next, FIG. 46 is a flow chart of second main game winning combination pre-reading determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) in FIG. The present processing is divided into two, processing pertaining to the prohibition condition of the pre-reading lottery and processing pertaining to the pre-drawing lottery. In the prohibition process of the former pre-reading lottery, first, at step 2602, the pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b and the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or not Determine if In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b and there is a pending with information indicating that the trigger is on pending within the pending It is determined whether there is any. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the reserve pre-reading effect executability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22 b and determines whether or not there is a big hit pending in the new pending. Determine if In the case of Yes in step 2606, the process moves to step 2608.

  Next, in the process relating to the latter pre-reading lottery, first, in step 2608, pending pre-reading effect execution possibility decision expedient SM26k referring to drawing pending information temporary storage expedient SM22b, the new pending becomes the big hit pending It is determined whether the In the case of Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, with respect to the new hold, the reserve pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k has a predetermined probability (in a probability lower than the winning rate of the first main game winning pre-selection lottery for big hit hold). In the present example, a prize pre-reading lottery to be won in 1/5) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, if No in step 2608, in step 2612 the reserve prefetch effect execution possibility determination unit SM26k refers to the drawing suspension information temporary storage unit SM22b, and the new suspension change mode group is group C or not. Determine if In the case of Yes in step 2612, in step 2616, with respect to the new hold, the hold pre-reading effect executability judging means SM 26k has a predetermined probability (in a probability lower than the winning rate of the first main game winning pre-selection lottery for lost hold). In the present example, a prize pre-selection lottery to be won at 1/15) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 2612, the process proceeds to step 2620.

  Next, at step 2620, the pending look-ahead rendering execution availability determination means SM 26k determines whether or not the winning look-ahead lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2620, in step 2622, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k is “trigger pending” in the new pending winning in the prize pre-reading lottery in the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b. Information to the effect is added and temporarily stored, and the processing proceeds to the next processing {processing of step 2126 (second processing)}. Also in the case of No at step 2602, step 2604, step 2606 or step 2620, the process proceeds to the next process {the process of step 2126 (second process)}.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, in any of the cases where a new hold is a big hit and a loss, a read ahead for the hold on the first main game side is more than a read ahead lottery for the hold on the second main game side The lottery is easier to win (pre-read lottery winning rate when the first main game hold is a big hit hold ratio = 1/3> 2) The second main game hold is a big hit pre-selection lottery Winning rate = 1/5, first read lottery winning rate when the first main game hold is on hold lost ratio = 1/10> preread lottery winning rate when the second main game hold is on hold to be a big hit = 1 / 15). By configuring in this manner, the "special symbol" related to the first main game side appears more than the "special symbol" related to the second main game side even in the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as the prefetch effect It is easy to do.

  Next, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of prefetch hold content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second) in FIG. First, in step 2652, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the trigger hold is a big hit hold. If Yes in step 2652, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of trigger hold in step 2654 with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), and the next process (step 2118) Move to On the other hand, if the result of step 2652 is No, the display mode of trigger suspension is determined in step 2656 with reference to the suspension display mode determination table (when lost), and the process proceeds to the next process (process of step 2118).

  Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) and the hold display mode decision table (at the time of losing). In the second embodiment, the type of display mode that can be selected when determining the display mode of trigger hold that can change when holding change effect execution is performed with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) is rainbow color, There are four types of red, green and blue, and the display types that can be selected in the case of determination with reference to the hold display mode determination table (when lost) are three types of red, green and blue, and the hold display It is drawn by random number for exclusive use at the time of mode decision. In addition, when referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the big hit), red is most easily selected, while at the time of referring to the hold display mode decision table (at the time of losing), blue is most easily selected. Big hit expectation degree (expected degree to be a big hit in the symbol variation related to the hold) for each display mode of hold when occurrence occurs is selected only at the time of big hit when the rainbow color is, except the rainbow color, the expectation degree In order of red, green and blue. In addition, the display mode which can be changed is an example to the last, and even if it increases and decreases a kind, even if it changes the color which can change, there is no problem at all. Moreover, in this example, although it was comprised so that the degree of expectation which will be a big hit could be suggested by the display color of pending | holding, it is not limited to this, For example, ) May be configured to indicate the game state after the special game is performed. When configured as such, in particular, during the probability variation gaming state, by the display color of the suspension, suggesting the degree of expectation to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the special game is executed in the case of a big hit in the suspension (For example, if the reserve display color is red, the probability change expectation degree is high, if it is blue, the probability change expectation degree is low, etc.), the probability fluctuation game state advantageous to the player continues or ends It is possible to carry out an effective rendition.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, when holding change effect is executed, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the display mode selected from the plurality of display modes of holding. In addition, it may be configured to be able to execute a plurality of hold change effects during execution of the pre-reading effect (from the timing when the pre-reading lottery is won to the end of fluctuation of the main game symbol related to trigger hold). When configured in this manner, for example, when the hold change effect is executed twice during the execution of the pre-read effect, if the display mode of the hold that changes in the first hold change effect is blue, the second time Make the display mode of the change of the hold change effect into green or red, that is, change (rank up) to the display mode of the high hit expectation of the big hit every time the hold change effect is executed It is desirable to configure it so as to keep the player's expectation. In addition, the effect relating to the pending display change is not limited to this, and as a result, a presentation mode without accompanying the pending display change may be provided. An effect may occur, and an effect aspect (so-called, cassette pattern) in which the hold display does not change as it is may be provided, and an effect mode in which the hold display change is executed thereafter.

  Next, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is the step 2206 (second) and the step 2250 (second), and the purpose thereof is the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol (including the time of temporary stop), in particular, the aforementioned “ The purpose is to change the factor for determining the “special symbol” (ie, a symbol that does not mean a big hit, but later announces that a big hit may occur). That is, after turning on the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2204, in step 2206 (second), the display display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, reach effect display content determination means SM25n) Refers to the symbol information temporarily stored in the main information temporary storage means SM11b (variation mode related to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21 ta, and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol {For example, if the fluctuation mode relating to the main game pattern is a short-term fluctuation, non-reach, if it is a long-term fluctuation, normal reach or super reach etc.} is determined and drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b Temporarily store in (and notice production related information temporary storage means SM24b, reach production related information temporary storage means SM25b), step 2 To migrate to 08.

  In addition, after the decorative symbol effect contents are determined in step 2216 and the display update timing and the display update contents are set, in step 2250 (second), the costume display content determining means SM21n is a notice effect / wear to be described later. The figure stop symbol determination processing is executed, and the process shifts to step 2218. That is, the stop symbol (including the time of temporary stop) of the first decorative symbol is determined in the notice effect / painting stop symbol determination process described later.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flow chart of advance notice / drawing stopping symbol determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 (second) in FIG. First, in step 2252, the notice effect display control unit SM24 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage unit SM22b, and determines whether the change is a change related to trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the notice effect display control unit SM24 turns off the angel zone in-progress flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage unit SM24b. Next, in step 2260, the notice effect display control unit SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from the “special notice effect candidate”. Here, the “special advance notice effect candidate” is an advance notice effect candidate to be referred to when deciding the advance notice effect when the background effect is the “angel zone background” described later. Next, in step 2262, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information on the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol, and the next processing (processing of step 2218) Move to). Here, in step 2262, it is desirable that the above-mentioned "special symbol" is not selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol, and the reason is that "angel zone" described later In the “Background” state (ie, in the state in which the presence of a high-hit expected high-hold has already been notified), the above-mentioned “special symbol” (that is, it does not mean a big hit, but after that a big hit may occur) This is because there is a risk that the player will have an inexplicable effect by the double notification of the similar information if the symbol (a symbol for giving a prior notice) is stopped and displayed.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2252, at step 2256, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not trigger hold exists in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2256, in step 2258, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b and determines whether or not the angel zone rushing flag is off. If Yes in step 2258, then the process moves to step 2264. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2258, the process proceeds to step 2260.

  Next, in step 2264, the notice effect display control unit SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from the “normal notice effect candidate”. Here, the “normal advance presentation effect candidate” is an advance presentation effect candidate to be referred to when determining the advance presentation effect when the background effect is other than the “angel zone background” described later. Next, in step 2266, the notice effect display control unit SM24 turns on the angel zone in-rush flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage unit SM24b. Next, in step 2268, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol of the middle row of the first decorative symbol as "special symbol", and based on the information on the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol, the first decorative symbol The temporary stop symbols of the left row and the right row are determined (the symbols different from the left row and the right row are temporarily stopped), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2218).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2256, the preliminary announcement effect display control means SM24 determines at step 2270 whether or not the fluctuation mode group of the fluctuation is group 3 {by this processing, fluctuation not in group 3 An angel zone transfer lottery, described later, is not subject to the lottery selection for the angel zone transition lottery, and the change related to the suspension of the group 3 that did not win in the prefetch lottery (presence for trigger reserve). It becomes object of lottery of. In the case of Yes in step 2270, in step 2272, the notice effect display control means SM24 indicates that the change is a pseudo continuous change (a change in which the pseudo change is performed at least once. In this example, it is illustrated in FIGS. It is determined whether or not the effects A-1, A-2, B-2 and so on) are to be executed. In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2274, the advance notice effect display control means SM24 changes the background effect to the angel zone background during an angel zone transition lottery winning with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example) Perform a lottery). Next, in step 2276, the preliminary announcement effect display control means SM24 determines whether or not the angel zone shift lottery has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2276, in step 2278, the notice effect display control unit SM24 determines the contents of notice effect from "normal notice effect candidate → special notice effect candidate after special symbol temporary stop timing" (for example, FIG. In the case of A-1 and A-2, until 14 seconds from the fluctuation start time, the notice effect contents are determined from the “normal notice effect candidate”, and after 14 seconds from the fluctuation start to be the first middle row temporary stop timing , Determine the content of the notice effect from "special notice effect candidate"). Next, in step 2280, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 changes the temporary stop symbol in the middle row of the first (first in the continuous continuous fluctuation) of the main gaming symbol to the "special symbol" (the background effect is changed to the angel zone Decided to be a decorative symbol to inform the player that he or she is, based on the information on the stop symbol of the main game symbol, the temporary stop symbol of the left row and the right row of the first decorative symbol is the same symbol And the next processing (processing of step 2218). In addition, a temporary stop symbol is a temporary stop symbol of a false change in a false continuous change, and may be called a false connected symbol hereafter.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2270, step 2272 or step 2276, at step 2282, the notice effect display control unit SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from the “normal notice effect candidate”. Next, in step 2284, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information on the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol, and the next processing (processing of step 2218) Move to).

  In the second embodiment, at step 2274, an angel zone transition lottery is executed to determine whether or not the transition angel zone transition is possible (the pseudo consecutive symbol in the middle of the variation is set as the "special symbol" and the special symbol symbol Although it was configured to determine whether or not to shift to the angel zone with the temporary stop as a trigger, it is not limited to this, and the combination of the first pseudo run symbol (the first middle row temporary stop symbol) and the notice effect A plurality of candidates may be provided, and at the time of pseudo continuous variation, a combination of a pseudo run symbol and a notice effect may be determined from among the combination candidates. Specifically, as the combination candidate, "pseudo run symbol A, preview effect 1", "run pseudo symbol D, run 2", "run symbol A, run 3", "run symbol A, notice Six combination candidates of effect 4 "," special symbol, notice effect 1 "and" special symbol, notice effect 2 "are provided, and the combination of the pseudo run symbol and the notice effect is determined by lottery from the candidates, and the pseudo run is determined. When a combination of a pseudo-series symbol and a notice effect that a symbol becomes a "special symbol" is selected, it may be configured to shift to the angel zone during the change. In addition, the determination method of the combination of the said pseudo run symbol and advance notice production is not limited only at the time of pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation, You may use the said determination method also in the case of another fluctuation | variation aspect. In addition, the combination is not limited to the pseudo run symbol and the notice effect, and may include a background effect, a sound aspect, and the like.

  In addition, as a method of determining the notice effect, at first, the basic notice effect (such as the notice effect that can be performed regardless of the background effect being performed, the effect to be performed in the first half of the change, etc.) After that, based on the determined basic advance effect, the effect other than the advance effect such as background effect is determined, the determined effect (advance effect, background effect, etc.) is executed, and then the effect is determined It may be configured to determine the undecided effect of the advance effect based on the basic advance effect and the effect that is not the advance effect such as the determined background effect etc. (The determination method is repeated multiple times. , And may be configured to determine all of the notice effects to be performed in the variation). By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine, at a plurality of timings, the advance notice effect to be executed in the relevant fluctuation, which is generated by determining all the advance notice effects to be executed in the relevant fluctuation at one timing, It will be possible to reduce the problem of the effect and the like. In this example, (1) "confirmed stop": fixed stop is executed after temporary stop, and if the fixed stopped symbol combination is a big hit (three matches of the same symbol), it shifts to a special game If it is a loss (not 3 sets of the same symbol), it does not shift to a special game, (2) "temporary stop": temporary stop is executed before fixed stop (for example, fluctuation), 1 time In the middle of the fluctuation in the symbol fluctuation, the pseudo fluctuation can be executed by re-flucting after temporary stop in the middle of the fluctuation in the symbol fluctuation. It is configured not only to be displayed but also to be displayed as a temporary stop before the final stop. Moreover, in this example, the fixed stop and the final stop are synonymous, and although "stop" is used for both the fixed stop and the temporary stop, the fixed stop symbol with the stop symbol in the change of the main game symbol Is used for, and the stop symbol in the change of the decorative symbol is used for both the temporary stop symbol and the fixed stop symbol (when the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is "777", etc., the stop symbol is described = Confirmed stop symbol)).

  Here, the lower part of the same figure is an image figure showing an example of a notice effect and mounting stop symbol display. As shown in the upper part of the same image figure, in this example, when transitioning to the angel zone in the variation, under the situation where normal background rendering (an example of background rendering that is not angel zone background rendering) is performed as background rendering, The "special symbol" is stopped as the first middle row temporary stop symbol. In addition, with the temporary stop of the “special symbol”, angel zone background effect is executed as background effect, and then the final stop pattern is stopped. In the present example, the case of becoming a big hit is illustrated, but the background effect is similarly switched also in the case of losing {For the temporary stop of the "special symbol in this case, the left and right The decorative symbols may be discolored (different symbols), but may not (is the same symbol) (= "special symbols" may temporarily stop after reaching)}.

  In addition, as shown in the middle of the same image, in the present example, when other pseudo continuous change without transition to the angel zone is performed (when the angel zone transfer lottery is not won), the background effect is usually performed as the background effect. A temporary stop symbol that informs the player that a pseudo continuous change is being executed, which is different from the "simulated run symbol A" ("special symbol") as the first middle row temporary stop symbol under the situation where ) Will temporarily stop. Next, even after “pseudo run symbol A” is temporarily stopped, the background effect is usually background effect, and then the final stop symbol is stopped.

  In addition, as shown in the lower part of the same image figure, in this example, when the background symbol is being executed as a background effect, if the winning symbol pre-selection lottery is won during the variation of the decorative symbol, it stops when the variation stops. As a symbol, the missing symbol (baroke eye) stops. After that, the next change is started, and the "special symbol" is stopped as a stop symbol of the change (that is, the change is the pre-read angel zone entry change). Next, when the “special symbol” is stopped, angel zone background rendering is executed as background rendering from the next variation (that is, the next variation is the first variation in the prefetch zone). In addition, in this example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (temporary stop display) in the symbol change related to the reserve scheduled to be digested prior to the trigger suspension, the temporary stop is not performed except for the fixed stop (the previous temporary stop) (It is not used in the case of re-variation after temporarily stopping as a stop symbol of the pseudo-variation). That is, in the symbol variation related to the reserve scheduled to be digested prior to the trigger suspension, the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension from "the timing when the special symbol is temporarily stopped → simulated variation is executed and the symbol variation becomes lost". Until the angel zone background is displayed can not be performed. As described above, in the second embodiment, the player stops the “special symbol” by performing the angel zone background rendition in response to the stop (or temporary stop) of the “special symbol”. By visually recognizing (or temporary stop), it is possible to recognize transition to the angel zone, and not only at the time of fluctuation stop (at the time of stop related to final display) but also at the time of temporary stop during fluctuation It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the stop (or temporary stop) of the symbol.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, when the "special symbol" is stopped as a temporary stop symbol at the time of pseudo continuous change, the same number in the left row and the right row is stopped (provisional stop) (at reach) On the other hand, when the “special symbol” stops as the final stop symbol of the next change after the pre-reading lottery winning on the other hand, different numbers (open side) are configured to stop in the left row and the right row There is.

  Next, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of background rendering control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2506 (second), that is, after setting “Angel zone background” as background effect in step 2504, in step 2506 (second), background effect display control means The SM 23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM 23 b, refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM 11 b, and changes (part of the pseudo continuous change) that triggered the transition of the “angel zone” Such a change) {the change that triggered the transition of the “Angel zone” (or the change related to suspension) is the change related to the trigger hold or the change angel zone transition change} whether or not judge. In the case of Yes in step 2506 (second), the process proceeds to step 2508, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 2520.

  By configuring as described above, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol as decorative symbols, and is configured to be able to execute a so-called reserve prefetching effect. When the "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as the first decorative symbol, a background change effect indicating that the transition expectation to the special game is increased is executed. And, with regard to the hold in the order of digestion before the hold (trigger hold) serving as a trigger for holding pre-reading effect, the “special symbol” is stopped and displayed as the fixed stop symbol at the time of symbol fluctuation of the first decorative symbol at the time of the hold digestion. Since the "special symbol" in this case is stopped and displayed, the meaning is "the symbol variation has ended" and "the transition to the special game has increased." On the other hand, with regard to trigger hold, since the "special symbol" can be stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol at the time of symbol fluctuation of the first decorative symbol at the time of the hold digestion, the meaning of "special symbol" in this case being stopped is , "The symbol variation is re-varied" and "the transition to a special game has increased." As described above, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, a novel effect technique is created that has different meanings depending on the timing (or the situation) when the stop display is made, though it is the same kind of “special symbol”. It will be possible to do.

  In the second embodiment, the "special symbol" is stop-displayed as the fixed stop symbol at the time of symbol fluctuation of the first decorative symbol at the time of the pending digest regarding the pending which becomes the digesting order prior to the trigger pending. With regard to trigger hold, it is configured to be the same kind of "special symbol" when "special symbol" is stopped and displayed as a temporary stop symbol at the time of symbol fluctuation of the first decorative symbol at the time of the hold digestion. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the "special symbol" in the former case may be "special symbol A", and the "special symbol" in the latter case may be "special symbol B". By configuring in this manner, it is possible to clearly convey to the player the meaning that the "special symbol" in both is stopped and displayed. Further, the probability that the “special symbol” is displayed in the former case may be configured to be lower than the probability that the “special symbol” is displayed in the latter case.

  Moreover, in this example, although the symbol row of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is three lines and the effective line is one line, there is no problem if these are changed, for example, (1) "special symbol" The symbol row and / or the effective line increase (for example, the effective line becomes 9 lines) triggered by the stop of the symbol (2) The symbol row and / or the effective when the "special symbol" is stopped The line decreases (for example, the symbol row becomes two rows, and one of the symbols comes to a reach state by stopping, and further, the symbol row becomes one row = substantially informed that it is a hit, and The user may be notified of the difference in profit margin given to the player by the type of symbol that is stopped and displayed.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, depending on the timing (or the situation) at which the “special symbol” is stopped and displayed, the “special symbol” has a different meaning. It is possible to create a more novel rendering technique by enhancing the interlocking with the Therefore, an example of such a configuration is set as a first modification of the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the first embodiment to the first modification of the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are from step 2220 (second variation 1) to step 2224 (second variation 1), and the purpose thereof is, at the time of the hold-in, with respect to the change-in-hold of the display mode by the hold pre-reading effect The contents of the effects in the are in connection with the changed display mode. That is, after the decorative symbol effect contents are determined in step 2216 and the display update timing and the display update contents are set, in step 2220 (the second modification 1), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays drawing hold information With reference to temporary storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the hold display mode related to the variation is a dedicated effect display mode (a specific hold display mode different from the other hold display modes, and in this example, red) Do. In the case of Yes at step 2220 (the second modification 1), at step 2222 (the second modification 1), the notice effect display control means SM24 determines the contents of the notice effect from the “dedicated notice effect candidates”. Here, the “dedicated advance presentation effect candidate” is a presentation candidate selected only in the change relating to the suspension of the dedicated effect display mode (red in this example) that is the specific suspension display mode, for example, at the time of the change It can be mentioned that a battle rendition with a specific enemy character is executed. In addition, it is desirable that the symbol variation relating to the “dedicated advance presentation effect candidate” is configured so that the jackpot expectation degree is relatively high as compared with the other advance presentation effect candidates. Next, in step 2223 (the second modification 1), the notice effect display control means SM24 turns off the angel zone in-progress flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. Next, in step 2224 (the second modification 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol based on the information on the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol, step 2218 Migrate to In the case of No at step 2220 (the second modification 1), the process proceeds to step 2250 (the second). Here, if the "special symbol" is easily selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol, the hold display mode is the special effect display mode, and the first decorative symbol is Interlocking with the fact that "special symbol" is easy to be selected as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) can be further enhanced.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the first modification from the second embodiment, the reserved special display mode (red in this example), which is a specific reserved display mode, is reserved as a preliminary effect candidate. By configuring “dedicated advance presentation effect candidate”, which is a presentation candidate selected only in the variation pertaining to, to be executed, the hold change effect based on the winning of the pre-reading lottery (effect of changing the hold display mode) There can be provided a notice effect that is executed only when the display mode is changed to a specific hold display mode, and by increasing the jackpot expectation when the effect is executed, the player can hold the game when the hold changes. Focusing on the display color (hold change execution mode) will increase the interest of the game. In addition, in the first modification from the second embodiment, the effect to be executed in the symbol variation related to trigger suspension is not determined when the trigger suspension occurs, but is determined when the trigger suspension is digested. In this way, by configuring as such, “trigger hold occurs → hold display mode is determined and displayed in the display mode → trigger hold is digested → hold display related to trigger hold Based on the mode, the effect to be executed in the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension may be determined. In addition, there is no problem in applying the configuration according to the reserve digest transmission image described later to the first modification from the second embodiment.

  In the first modification example from the second embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed as a so-called hold ahead read effect and the hold display mode becomes the dedicated effect display mode (red in this example), the contents of the notice effect Is configured to select from the "dedicated notice effect candidate", but the hold change effect is executed at the timing when the "special symbol" stops as the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) of the first decorative symbol, the hold change effect For example, as a "special symbol", "special symbol A" and "special symbol B" are provided as "special symbol", and "special symbol A" is stopped. In this case, while the display changes to a display mode other than red as the display change effect, if the "special symbol B" is stopped, the display mode may be changed to the red display mode as a display change effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further enhance the interlocking between so-called reserved advance presentation effects and the “special symbol”.

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the interlocking relationship between the so-called reserve prefetching effect and the “special symbol” is further enhanced. However, the interlocking between the first main game side and the second main game side The strength and weakness of the sex may be made different, and an example of such a configuration is taken as a second modification of the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment to the second modification. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2226 (second), step 2250 (1) (second change 2) and step 2250 (2) (second change 2), the purpose of which is the first main It is controlled to change the selection rate of the "special symbol" depending on whether it is the symbol variation on the game side or the symbol variation on the second main game side. That is, after the decorative symbol effect content is determined in step 2216 and the display update timing and display update content are set, in step 2226 (the second modification 2), the dressing display content determination means SM21 n temporarily stores the main side information With reference to means SM11b, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2226 (the second change 2), in the step 2250 (1) (the second change 2), the display display content determination means SM21n determines the first main game notice effect / drawing stop symbol described later. The process is executed, and the process moves to step 2218. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2226 (the second change 2), in step 2250 (2) (the second change 2), the figure display content determination means SM21n, described later, the second main game notice effect · dress stop The symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2218.

  Next, FIG. 53 shows the first main game preview effect / imprinting stop symbol determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 (1) (second modification 2) in FIG. 52 in the second embodiment to the second modification. Flowchart of FIG. Since the processing of this subroutine is the same processing as the advance notice / dressing stop symbol determination processing of step 2250 (second), the description is omitted. In the second embodiment, in the second embodiment, the same process is executed on the first main game side and the second main game side. The purpose is to execute separate processing on the main game side and the second main game side.

  Next, FIG. 54 shows the second main game preview effect / imprinting stop symbol determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 (2) (second modification 2) in FIG. 52 in the second embodiment to the second modification. Flowchart of FIG. Since the processing of this subroutine is similar to the notice effect / drawing stopping symbol determination processing of step 2250 (second), only differences from the processing will be described in detail. Step 2250 (the second) difference from the notice production · design stop symbol determination process is step 2286 (the second change 2) and step 2288 (the second change 2), that is, in step 2256, in the pending If the trigger hold does not exist at step 2286 (the second modification 2), the notice effect display control unit SM24 refers to the main information temporary storage unit SM11 b, and the change is a change related to the group C. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2286 (second modification 2), in step 2272, the preliminary announcement effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b, and is the change a change for which the pseudo continuous change is executed? It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2272, in step 2288 (the second modification 2), the notice effect display control means SM24 has a predetermined probability (the angel zone shift lottery winning ratio of the first main game side executed in step 2274 is 1 In the present example, an angel zone shift lottery having a probability lower than 10 is selected and executed in 1/30) is performed, and the process shifts to step 2276. In the case of No at step 2286 (second modification 2), the process moves to step 2282.

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the second modification from the second embodiment, an angel zone shift lottery (a simulation is performed by symbol variation on the first main game side and symbol variation on the second main game side) The symbol variation on the first main game side is configured by making the winning probability of “special symbol” temporarily stop in continuous variation and the lottery of whether or not the angel zone background is displayed as background effect different. It becomes possible to change the selection rate of the "special symbol" in the first decorative symbol depending on whether there is a symbol variation on the second main game side, and thus, the symbol variation on the first main game side By making the accompanying presentation tendency different from the presentation tendency accompanying the symbol variation on the second main game side, it is possible to widen the range of the presentation and to enhance the interest in the presentation.

  In the second modification of the second embodiment, the second main game hold is configured not to be a trigger hold in the non-time shortening gaming state, so the second main in the non-time shortening gaming state The pending look-ahead effect for the game side is not executed. Therefore, in the non-time shortening gaming state, the appearance rate of the "special symbol" related to the hold pre-reading effect on the first main game side and the appearance rate of the "special symbol" related to the hold pre-reading effect on the second main game side are compared Even then, the appearance rate is different (the first main game side is higher). Furthermore, as described above, whether the lottery probability for temporarily stopping the “special symbol” in the pseudo continuous variation is symbol variation on the first main game side or symbol variation on the second main game side Whether it is a hold on the 1st main game side also about the ease of occurrence of the trigger hold, depending on whether the first special game side's symbol variation is more likely to cause the "special symbol" to temporarily stop. Because it differs according to whether it is a hold on the 2nd main game side (the hold on the 1st main game side is likely to be a trigger hold), a trigger hold occurs → a hold on hold that is digested before the trigger hold At the time of digestion, the "special symbol" is displayed in a definite manner (so-called reserve pre-reading effect is executed) → the "special symbol" is temporarily stopped at the time of reserve termination of trigger reserve (so-called pseudo continuous variation is executed), Also the probability that the flow of a series of effects will occur is the first main game It is also possible to configure so that the direction of the high-probability than the second main player side. In addition, in the non-time shortening gaming state, the pseudo continuous in the symbol variation which relates to the 2nd main game symbol appearance ratio of the symbol variation where the “special symbol” temporarily stops in the pseudo continuous variation in the symbol variation which relates to the 1st main game symbol The difference between the appearance rate of the symbol variation in which the "special symbol" temporarily stops due to the variation, and the appearance rate of the "special symbol" as the look-ahead effect in the symbol variation relating to the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol When comparing with the difference with the appearance rate of the “special symbol” as the pre-reading effect in the symbol variation, the difference (the former difference) relating to the pseudo continuous variation is smaller.

  Also, in this example, (1) the selection probability (appearance rate) of the “special symbol” may be made the same between the first main game side and the second main game side, If there is a second main game hold, the "special symbol" related to the pre-reading effect does not appear in the variation of the second main game symbol, (3) a jackpot hold exists in the first main game hold If there is a "special symbol" related to the pre-reading effect can appear in the variation of the first main gaming symbol, (4) "special symbol" pertaining to the pseudo continuous variation in the case of the variation that becomes the big hit of the second main gaming symbol (5) In the case of the fluctuation which becomes a big hit of the (5) 1st main game pattern, it may be constituted so that the "special symbol" concerning pseudo continuous change may appear or it is easy to appear. Further, in the second modification of the second embodiment, the "special symbol" is configured to appear both at the time of the pre-reading effect and at the time of pseudo continuous fluctuation, but the "special symbol A" may appear only at the pre-reading effect. "Special symbol", "special symbol B" as "special symbol" that can appear only at the time of pseudo continuous change, compare the appearance ratio of "special symbol A" and "special symbol B", and the second main game symbol In the variation, the "special symbol A" does not appear, and in the variation of the second main game symbol, the "special symbol B" may have a low appearance rate, and so on.

(Modification 3 from the second embodiment)
Here, in the second embodiment, the background change effect and the on-hold change effect are executable as so-called on-hold effect, but a new game is created by changing the execution mode of the on-hold effect. It is possible. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is set as a third modification of the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 55 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub control substrate S (in particular, the side of the sub main control unit SM) in the second embodiment to the modification 3. The changes from the second embodiment are steps 2700 (second variant 3) and 2750 (second variant 3), that is, after the decorative symbol display content determination process is executed in step 2200, step 2700 (second variant). In the second modification 3), the sub control board S executes a suspension display mode change control process described later. Next, in step 2750 (second modification 3), the sub control substrate S executes a hold digest transmission image display control process, which will be described later, and shifts to step 2300.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the pending information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 55 in the second embodiment to the third modification. The point of change from the second embodiment is step 2130 (the second modification 3), the purpose of which is to notify that the certain holding is in process of digesting (during symbol variation) at the time of the digestion of a certain holding. It is to be able to display the image of. That is, after subtracting 1 from the rendering reserve counter value in step 2112, the rendering reserve information display control means SM22 determines the reserve information (in particular, the display mode) related to the symbol variation in step 2130 (the second modification 3). And the variation mode group information), "pending digestion transmission image information" {during the pending display of the pending pending related to the starting variation concerned, during the starting fluctuation (the starting variation concerned starts, the holding pending Temporarily store (overwrite and store) the preliminary presentation related information temporary storage means SM 24 b as information relating to the “pending digestion transmission image” which is continuously displayed after being digested), and the process proceeds to step 2128 (second) Do. In the third modification from the second embodiment, the second main game winning combination pre-reading determination process is deleted (prefetch lottery is executed only on the first main game side).

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flow chart of first main game winning combination pre-reading determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second modification 3) of FIG. 56 in the third modification from the second embodiment. Here, the present processing is divided into two, processing pertaining to the prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery and processing pertaining to the prefetch lottery. In the processing relating to the prohibition condition of the former prefetch lottery, first, at step 2580, the reservation prefetch effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new reservation is the second main game It is determined whether or not it is not a hold (a hold that is prioritized over the first main game hold). In the case of Yes in step 2580, the reserve pre-reading effect execution possibility determination means SM 26k refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11 b in step 2582 and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2584, in step 2586, pending preliminary reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22b, and the pending mode of pending before the new pending changes the group to group 1 pending It is determined whether or not there is only a hold that is a big hit before the new hold, a hold that may result in a long fluctuation time, and a trigger hold. If Yes in step 2584, then the process moves to step 2586.

  Next, in the process relating to the latter pre-reading lottery, first, in step 2586, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k refers to the drawing pending information temporary storage means SM22 b, and the fluctuation mode group of the new pending Determining whether or not it is group 3 {Variation mode Change regarding the suspension where group is group 3 is the case where the number of reservations at the start of the change is large (for example, the number of reservations is 2 or 3) , A relatively long fluctuation time}. In the case of Yes in step 2586, in step 2588, pending pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k has a predetermined probability (for example, 2/3 if the pending is a big hit pending, 1/8 if a lost pending). The winning pre-selection lottery will be executed. Next, at step 2590, the pre-holding effect executability judging means SM 26k judges whether or not the winning pre-selection lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2590, in step 2591 the pending look-ahead presentation execution executability judging means SM26k adds information to the effect that it is “trigger pending” to the new pending winning in the pre-winning lottery at the time of winning and The mode is determined to be "yellow zap reserve", and is stored in the reserve information temporary storage area of the drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22b. Here, the trigger hold is a hold on which the winning pre-selection lottery is won, and is a hold that can be a display mode different from the normal hold mode. Next, in step 2592, the pending look-ahead presentation execution availability determination unit SM26k determines that the pending pending change plan until the pending pending trigger is digested based on the new pending (trigger pending) and the current number of pendings ( For example, determine the execution plan of the effect such as green zako reserve at next change start, change to red zako reserve at next change start, etc., and store in reserve information temporary storage area of drawing reserve information temporary storage means SM22b, The next process (the process of step 2118) is performed.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2580 (when the new hold is the second main game hold), at step 2596, the hold prefetching effect executability judging means SM26k temporarily stores in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. While deleting the information to the effect of being "trigger hold" from the information related to the first main game hold being held (when there is no hold having information indicating that trigger hold is in hold, this processing is executed Move to the next process without changing the hold display mode to “normal hold” (for example, white hold) and store it in the hold information temporary storage area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, step 2594 Migrate to Also in the case of No at step 2582, step 2584, step 2586 or 2590, the process moves to step 2594.

  Next, in step 2594, the holding pre-reading effect executability judging means SM26k determines the new holding display mode of the new holding as "normal holding" (for example, white holding), and the drawing holding information temporary storage means SM22b It is stored in the pending information temporary storage area, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2118). Here, the processing of step 2596 and step 2594 is newly generated in the gaming machine of the second main game side priority digest such as in this example, when the second main game side suspension exists (is generated). In order to settle the second main game's hold first, it will not be in the scheduled change order, and the situation where pre-reading effect (for example, hold display mode change effect based on hold change plan) over multiple changes is not executed normally Is a configuration to avoid the

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 55 in the third modification example from the second embodiment. The changes from the second embodiment are step 2208 (second variation), step 2222 (second variation 3) to step 2226 (second variation 3) and step 2228 (second variation 3), that is, After determining the variation mode of the first decorative symbol in step 2206 (second), in step 2208 (second change 3), the figure display content determination means SM21 n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM 24 n, reach effect display) The content determination means SM 25 n) refers to the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM 21 ta, and the variation mode of the second decorative symbol {eg, when the variation mode relating to the main game symbol is a short-term variation, Reach, if it is a long-term fluctuation, normal reach or super reach etc.} is decided, drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and notice effect related information temporary storage means SM 4b, temporarily stored in the reach demonstration related information temporary storage means SM25b). Next, in step 2216, the drawing display content determination means SM21n is the result of the main gaming symbol's success or failure temporarily stored in the main information temporary storage means SM11b and the decoration pattern (the first decoration symbol and the second decoration symbol) Based on the variation mode, the decoration symbol effect content is determined with reference to the decoration symbol effect table SM21 ta-2 (for example, the decoration symbol effect table 1 to the decoration symbol effect table 2) in the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21 ta, The display update timing and the display update content are set and temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2222 (the second modification 3), the clothing display content determination means SM21 n randomly determines the content of the notice effect to be executed during the fluctuation. Here, as shown in the notice content image diagram on the right of the figure, in this example, the contents of the notice effect that can be executed are different depending on the image (so-called stay stage) set as the background effect. The content lottery of the notice effect to be executed may be executed based on an appropriate random number acquired on the side of the sub main control unit SM, a result of success or failure of the change, a winning symbol, a change time, and the like. Here, the notice effect contents with an asterisk in the same image diagram is the specific notice effect in the present example, and different specific notice effects can be executed based on the stay stage (specific notice effect) Will be described in the processing described later). In addition, the contents of the notice effect (in this example, the effect that can be performed before reach effect etc.) are not limited to this, and for example, a pseudo-series effect (effect that a pseudo continuous fluctuation is performed) can be performed (In that case, the display mode of the reserve digestion transfer image or reserve to be described later may be changed in the pseudo sequence effect, or the suspension digest transfer image described later by the notice effect performed during the pseudo sequence effect And may change the display mode of the hold).

  Next, in step 2224 (the second modification 3), the clothing display content determination means SM 21 n refers to the “pending digest transmission image information” temporarily stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM 24 b and the change is It is determined whether or not it is a change related to trigger hold. In the case of Yes in step 2224 (second variant 3), the drawing display content determination means SM21 n in step 2226 (second variant 3) is a drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b (or notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24 b ) Based on the "pending digestion transmission image information" about the yes or no according to the variation, the variation mode, or the notice effect, the reserve digestion transmission image change plan (for example, at the time of pseudo consecutive symbol stop: yellow zako reserve → green zako During the hold and reach, a continuous hit of the button: green zako hold → change to red star hold, etc. execution plan of the effect is determined, stored in the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM 24 b, and the process shifts to step 2218. Also in the case of No in step 2224 (the second modification 3), the process shifts to step 2218.

  Next, in step 2218 and step 2228 (the second modification), the drawing display content determination means SM21 n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21. The on-hold display mode change process execution flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of the suspension display mode change control process according to the subroutine of step 2700 (second modification 3) of FIG. 55 in the third modification example from the second embodiment. First, in step 2702, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether the in-hold display mode change processing execution flag is ON. In the case of Yes in step 2702, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b in step 2704 to determine whether or not the current gaming state is not the time shortening gaming state. If YES in step 2704, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b in step 2706 to determine whether or not there is a trigger hold in the hold. If YES in step 2706, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 confirms the hold change plan stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b in step 2708. Next, in step 2710, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines, based on the hold change plan, whether or not there is a change plan of the hold display mode during the change.

  If Yes in step 2710, in step 2712, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the notice production related information temporary storage means SM 24b, and performs a notice notice during the notice effect to be executed during the change (see FIG. 49). ) Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2712, in step 2714, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is based on the notice mode temporarily stored in the first drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. It is determined whether or not the execution timing of the specific advance notice effect has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2714, the process shifts to step 2718 (the display mode of the hold is changed in accordance with the execution of the specific advance notice effect).

  Here, FIG. 60 is a holding change image diagram in the specific advance notice effect. In this example, an example in which the display mode of the hold is changed according to the notice of grass unevenness in the flat ground zone (in particular, the notice of grass unevenness in which a snake that is a specific notice effect appears) is described. First, in the state where there is a trigger hold in the hold, the fluctuation related to the hold before the trigger hold starts {in this example, the display mode of the trigger hold at this point is normally hold (white hold)}.

  Next, a notice of grass unevenness, which is a notice effect during the change, is executed, and an image for dividing the grass and searching for something is displayed.

  Next, an image is displayed in which a snake (the expectation for becoming a big hit during the variation is “low”) appears from the shade of the grass.

  Here, when there is no plan of the hold display change during the change, an image in which the snake appearing from behind the grass unevenness is leaving the screen is displayed, and the notice effect is ended.

  On the other hand, when there is a schedule for holding display change during the change, unlike the case described above, an image is displayed in which the snake that has appeared from the shade of the grass jumps to a holding (a trigger hold that is normally held at this point) Ru. Thereafter, the display mode of the hold (trigger hold) in which the snake jumps changes, and is displayed in a hold display mode (in this example, Zako hold) different from the normal hold. In addition, you may be comprised so that the production | presentation (so-called, Gasse production) in which the display mode of pending | holding does not change even if the said specific advance notice production is performed can be performed.

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2712 (when the specific advance notice effect is not executed during the change), at step 2716, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is general purpose hold change effect (can be executed independently of other effects And a command for displaying, for example, an effect that a hold is exploded is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). To step 2718).

  Next, in step 2718, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the trigger hold on the basis of the hold change plan stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the drawing hold information The temporary storage means SM22b stores it. Next, in step 2720, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns off the pending display mode change processing execution flag in the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22 b, and the next process {step 2750 Move to the processing of (second modification 3)}. If No in step 2704, step 2706 or step 2710, the process goes to step 2720. If No in step 2702 or step 2714, the next process {the process of step 2750 (the second modification 3)} Transition.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of the hold digest image display process according to the subroutine of step 2750 (second modification 3) of FIG. 55 in the third modification of the second embodiment. First, in step 2752, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol variation flag is on. If the result of step 2752 is "Yes", the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the preliminary presentation related information temporary storage means SM24b in step 2754 to determine whether or not the flag on display of reserve digest transmission image is off. Determine if In the case of Yes in step 2754, in step 2756, the drawing hold information display control unit SM22 displays the display mode of the hold digestion transfer image based on the hold digest transmission image information temporarily stored in the preliminary presentation related information temporary storage unit SM24b. Determine the (initial display mode). Here, the reserve digest transmission image is an image that continuously displays the reserve related to the change even during the change (after the change starts and the reserve related to the change is digested). . By displaying the reserve digest transmission image, the player can easily recognize that the variation is a variation relating to zako reserve even during a variation related to a reserve (for example, zako reserve) in which the display mode is changed within the reserve. During the change, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the reserved digestive tract transfer image.

  Next, in step 2758, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the pending digestion transfer image display flag in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and proceeds to step 2760. On the other hand, if the result of step 2754 is NO, the process moves to step 2760.

  Next, at step 2760, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, and confirms the hold digest transmission image change plan. Next, in step 2762, the drawing reservation information display control means SM 22 determines whether or not there is a plan for changing or deleting the display mode of the reservation digestion transmission image during the fluctuation based on the reservation digestion transmission image change plan. Do. In the case of Yes in step 2762, in step 2764, the drawing reservation information display control means SM 22 displays the display format of the holding digest transmission image based on the first drawing fluctuation time management timer SM 21 t-1 and the holding digest transmission image change plan. It is determined whether or not a change timing (for example, at the time of re-variation start after displaying a pseudo-run temporary symbol temporary stop, a predetermined effect execution time, a predetermined period during reach effect) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2764, in step 2766, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 changes the holding digest transmission image display mode changing condition (for example, pressing of the sub input button during a predetermined period, the number of holdings is maximum, etc.) It is determined whether or not In the case of Yes in step 2766, in step 2768 and step 2770, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying the general-purpose hold change effect (for example, the effect that hold is exploded) (display command transmission in step 2999) The control process is sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side) and the display mode of the reserve digest transfer image is changed based on the reserve digest transfer image change plan (for example, red star reserve, green raccoon reserve, no display etc.) It changes to a display mode, stores it in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and proceeds to step 2780. Even when the result of step 2762 or step 2766 is No, the process moves to step 2780.

  Here, FIG. 62 is an image diagram of a change in reserved digestive transfer image. The change of the display mode of the reserve digestion transfer image in the third modification from the second embodiment is configured to be executed in the flow as illustrated in the figure. Note that, in this example, a pattern is shown in which the battle effect is transferred to (developed in) the battle effect (second half) without ending in the first half. First, a change related to trigger hold (at this moment, Zako hold) starts, and Zako hold is displayed as a hold digest image.

  Next, battle rendition (first half) is executed as rendition during the change. In this example, when the reserve digest transmission image is Zako hold, it is possible to change the display mode of the Zako hold by pressing the sub input button a predetermined number of times during execution of the battle effect (first half) in the change. Is configured. In this example, a predetermined effect can be executed by pressing the sub input button during execution of the battle effect (first half), but effects such as prompting the player's operation (depression of the sub input button) In particular, the operation of the sub input button is an input of a so-called hidden command (back button) because it is not executed.

  When a button is repeatedly hit (a sub input button is pressed a predetermined number of times) during execution of a battle effect (the first half), an attack is added to the zakko hold displayed as a hold digest image each time the sub input button is pressed The effect image is displayed.

  Next, when the number of depressions of the sub input button in the battle effect (first half) reaches a predetermined number, an image of exploding Zako, which is a retention digest transmission image, is displayed, and based on the retention digest transmission image change plan, The display mode of the hold digest image is changed and displayed (for example, the display mode of the hold is changed to red star hold or display). It should be noted that even after the transition to the battle effect (the second half), the reserve digest transmission image will be displayed (or not displayed) in the display mode after the display mode change {A player who inputs a hidden command does not Since there is an intention to expect the big hit expectation of the said change depending on the display mode of the transmission image, even after the transition to the battle rendition (the second half), the reserve digest transmission image is continuously displayed in the display mode after the display mode change. }.

  On the other hand, if the player does not hit the button continuously in the battle effect (first half) (or the number of times of continuous hits does not reach the predetermined number), Zako hold, which is a holding digest transmission image, is automatically exploded at the timing of transition to the battle effect (second half) While the image is displayed, the display of the reserve digestion transfer image is erased (by considering the player who enjoys a way of enjoying not expecting the big hit expectation of the variation by dare not hitting the button repeatedly, reserve digestion transfer image change plan Clear the display regardless of the content of In addition, in this example, the jackpot expectation of Zako retention is medium, and the jackpot expectation of Akoshi is a high expectation. In addition, when the battle effect (the second half) is executed, the big hit expectation increases rapidly compared to when the battle effect (the first half) is performed. Here, under the situation where the big hit expectation level is raised by shifting to the battle production (the second half), if the display of Zako hold whose mid level expectation level is medium is continued, the battle production which is a high hit type expectation level There is a possibility that the interest of (the second half) may be lost, but the stage with a high degree of expectation (this example, battle presentation (the second half)) does not have high expectations (in this example, Zako hold) By erasing, such a situation can be avoided. Although not particularly illustrated in this example, even if the number of times the sub input button is pressed does not reach the predetermined number, the display mode change timing of the hold digest transmission image is based on the hold digest transmission image change plan. It may be configured to automatically change the display mode of the reserve digestion transfer image. In such a configuration, for example, the display mode of the reserve digestion transfer image is automatically changed only when a change to a display mode is suggested to indicate that the jackpot expected degree in the variation is high. It may be configured as follows. In addition, when the button is not hit repeatedly (or the number of hits is less than the predetermined number), the display mode of the reserve digest transmission image is automatically changed at a predetermined timing only when the variation is a big hit or a probability variation big hit. It may be configured to be performed (so-called, an accurate effect can be performed).

  In addition, when it moves to battle production (the second half) without passing through battle production (the first half) {For example, drawing change start (all rows) → notice effect 1, display temporary stop display (left line) → rendering temporary Stop display (right row) → reach development round → battle reach (second half) image display → rendering temporary stop display (middle row) → execution according to success or failure → rendering finalization display (all rows) When performing a}, that is, a period during which the button is continuously hit {in this example, a battle effect (first half)} is not present, and a transition to a battle effect (second half) occurs, the timing when the battle effect (second half) is shifted In this case, Zako retention, which is a retention digestion transfer image, is automatically exploded, and the display mode of the retention digestion transfer image is changed and displayed based on the retention digestion transfer image change plan. In addition, although not particularly illustrated in this example, the number of pressing the sub input button necessary to change the display mode of the reserve digest transmission image has a high expectation of a big hit in the variation (a reserve display mode with a high degree of expectation) ) May be configured to be more likely to be selected. Further, although not particularly illustrated in this example, when the display mode of the reserve digest transmission image changes, in addition to the general purpose reserve change effect, an effect that suggests the contents of the change (for example, when Zako reserve is exploded) It may be configured to be able to carry out a serif and a warning. The content suggested by the last notice is the jackpot expectation of the change and the presentation contents to be implemented (for example, "Achichi!" = The jackpot expectation of 60% or more, "Omedeo!" = If the player does not press the sub-input button, the jackpot expectation of the fluctuation is calculated as the jackpot confirmation, “Bosuu!” = Battle reach development with the boss character, etc.). Assuming that the player does not think that he / she wants to predict, it is preferable to configure so as not to execute the last notice regarding the big hit expectation of the change (can only execute the last notice regarding the contents of the scheduled execution) . That is, only when changing the display mode of the reserve digest transmission image by the operation of the player, it may be configured to be able to execute the notice effect relating to the big hit expectation of the change based on the result of the change. In addition, the effects of the battle effect (first half) can be executed at “a4” and “b4” which are fluctuation times of 30 seconds.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of No at step 2764 (when it is not the time to change the display mode of the reserve digestion transfer image), at step 2772 the dressing reserve information display control means SM22 displays the reserve digestion transfer image display mode It is determined whether it is the timing to erase the In the case of Yes in step 2772, in step 2774, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the display mode deletion condition of the hold digest transmission image (for example, no depression of the sub input button during a predetermined period, the number of depressions of the sub input button Determines whether or not the condition is satisfied less than a predetermined number of times, etc.). In the case of Yes in step 2774, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying the general-purpose hold change effect (for example, the effect that the hold is exploded) in step 2776 and step 2778 (display command transmission in step 2999) In addition to being sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the control process, the display mode of the reserve digest transfer image is changed to "no display" (changed to "not show" regardless of the contents of the reserve digest transfer image change plan And temporarily store the drawing reservation information temporary storage means SM 22 b, and the process shifts to step 2780.

  Next, in step 2780, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets a command for displaying the hold digestion transfer image based on the display mode of the hold digestion transfer image temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. (It is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and shifts to the next process (process of step 2300). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2752, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 turns off the pending digest transmission image display flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b in step 2782. . Next, at step 2784, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 changes the display mode of the hold digestion transfer image to "no display" and temporarily stores it in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2786, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold digestion transfer image based on the display mode of the hold digestion transfer image temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (the process Then, the command for setting the hold digest transmission image to non-display is set (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control processing in step 2999), and the next processing (processing in step 2300) Migrate to

  In the third modification of the second embodiment, the reserve digest transmission image is configured to be displayed. However, the reserve digest transmission image may not always be displayed. The system may be configured not to display the pending digest delivery image corresponding to the pending digest, and to display the pending digest delivery image corresponding to the pending whose display mode is changed from the normal pending. By configuring in this way, the reserve digest transmission image is confirmed at the timing when the player wants to know the big hit expectation of the symbol variation, and if the reserve digest transmission image is displayed, the expectation is relatively high, If not displayed, it can be easily recognized that the degree of expectation is relatively low.

  Next, FIG. 63 is a flowchart of background effect control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 of FIG. 46 in the third modification example from the second embodiment. The point of change from the second embodiment is step 2524 (second variant 3) to step 2534 (second variant 3), that is, in step 2502, if the angel zone flag is off, step 2524 (second variant). In the second variation 3), the background effect display control means SM23 changes the decoration pattern based on the first drawing change time management timer SM21t-1 and the change mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether the start timing has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2524 (second modification 3), in step 2526 (second modification 3), the background effect display control unit SM23 refers to the drawing suspension information temporary storage unit SM22b and suspends the trigger within the suspension {described above It is determined whether or not there is a hold} which has been won in the first main game winning combination preselected lottery. In the case of Yes in step 2526 (second change 3), the background effect display control means SM23 executes an angel zone shift lottery winning with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) in step 2528 (second change 3) Do. Next, in step 2530 (second change 3), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the lottery result in step 2528 (second change 3) to determine whether or not the angel zone shift lottery has been won. . In the case of Yes in step 2530 (second modification 3), in step 2532 (second modification 3), the background effect display control means SM23 sets the angel zone flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. It turns on, and proceeds to step 2504.

  Also, after setting "Angel zone background" as the background effect in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 controls the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and the drawing hold information temporary in step 2534 (the second modification 3). With reference to the storage means SM22b, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation relating to trigger suspension has ended. In the case of Yes in step 2534 (the second modification), the process moves to step 2508, and in the case of No, the process moves to step 2520.

  By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the third modification from the second embodiment, the sub main control is performed with respect to a high expectation of holding a big hit (in particular, a hold on the first main game side) to be a big hit. While the display mode of the hold on the part SM side may be changed and displayed, and a predetermined advance notice effect (in this example, a specified advance notice effect, in particular, a notice effect of a low expectation level) is executed, the predetermined action The display mode of the hold can be changed and displayed in accordance with the movement of the displayed image and the advance notice effect. As a result, even if the notice effect with a low probability of a big hit in the fluctuation, the display mode of the hold may be changed, so the player's interest in the notice effect can be increased, and the interest of the game is improved. Is possible. In addition, when it moves to battle production (the second half) and big hit expectation rises, if the indication of Zako retention where mid hit expectation is medium is continued, the battle production which is production where big hit expectation is high Because there is a possibility that the interest of (the second half) may be lost, even if the player does not operate, the stage with a high degree of expectation (this example, the battle presentation (the second half)) is not the stage with high expectation. In this example, it is possible to hide the zako) and prevent the loss of the attraction of the effect. In addition, the condition that the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the sub input button SB a predetermined number of times) during a period in which a predetermined effect {for example, battle reach (first half)} during symbol variation is being executed. As it is possible to change the display mode of the reserve digest transmission image as a player participation type effect, the player who does not want to know the jackpot expectation degree of the change by the effect performs the predetermined operation. By not doing this, it is possible to provide a game in which selection can be made such that the display mode of the reserve digest transmission image is an effect that does not indicate the big hit expectation (for example, reserve digest transfer image deletion).

  In the third modification of the second embodiment, the background change effect and the hold change effect are provided as the pre-reading effect, and only the hold change effect is executed a plurality of times during the pre-reading effect execution, but The background change rendition may also be executed multiple times during the pre-reading effect execution (for example, it may be changed to the "true angel zone background" even after the change to the "angel zone background"). In addition, in such a configuration, the more the background change effect is executed (the greater the number of times of execution), the higher the expectation of becoming a big hit due to the fluctuation related to the prefetch effect being executed (rank It is desirable to configure it to In addition, background change presentation does not change (does not rank up) during the symbol change execution concerning trigger suspension.

Third Embodiment
Here, in the embodiment described above, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to start changing and stopping changing substantially at the same time as the main gaming symbol, but the changing aspect of the decorative symbol is not limited thereto. . Therefore, an example of such a configuration is taken as a third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  In the third embodiment, the second large winning opening C20 has a specific area C22 which is an area serving as a transition trigger of the probability variation gaming state by entering the ball.

  First, FIG. 64 (the main gaming table 1 and the main gaming table 2) is the first main gaming acceptance lottery table MN11ta-A (the second main gaming acceptance lottery table MN11ta-B) and the first in the third embodiment. It is an example of a lottery table MN41ta-A for main game symbol determination (a lottery table MN41ta-B for second main game symbol determination). The difference from the present embodiment is that the big hit probability in the probability variation gaming state is lowered, and a short open big hit and a long open big hit are provided as a big hit. Here, the short opening jackpot is the second large winning opening C20 for a short time (for example, 0.1) in the distribution game execution round (the round in which the second large winning opening C20 is to be opened) during the big hit. Second big winning opening C20 is a big hit that is only open, long opening big hit is the distribution game execution round (round where the second big winning opening C20 will be open) in the large hit It is a big hit that can be opened (for example, 30 seconds). In the third embodiment, when the game ball enters the specific area C22 during the distribution game execution round described above, the game characteristics such as transition to the probability fluctuation game state after the end of the special game under execution (So-called ball machine).

  Next, FIGS. 65 and 66 (main game table 3) are an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). The difference between this embodiment and the present embodiment is that both the first main game side and the second main game side are tables to be referred to when losing and in the time reduction gaming state, and the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation is “0. The contents of the table are different between “1” and “1 to 3”. In the third embodiment, among the variation modes of the second main game symbol selected in the time-saving gaming state, "b0 (1 second)" is a short variation, and other variation modes are a long variation, The method of determining the variation pattern of the decorative symbol (in particular, the first decorative pattern) is configured to be different depending on whether the variation pattern of the second main game symbol is short variation or long variation (details will be described later) . In addition, in the time reduction gaming state, the game will be mainly progressed on the second main game side (because the game is progressed by right-handling, only the symbol variation on the second main game side is executed, Or, the variation of the second main gaming symbol is easier to be executed than the variation of the first main gaming symbol).

  In addition, although the details will be described later, in the time reduction gaming state, since the variation time of the second decorative symbol is configured to be the same as the variation time of the second main gaming symbol, the first in the time reduction gaming state The variation time of the two decorative symbols is also determined depending on the number of reservations at the start of the symbol variation (which may differ depending on the number of reservations).

  Although not illustrated, in the third embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state, the game is mainly progressed on the second main game side (in order to advance the game by right-handling, the second main game Only the game side's symbol change will be executed), and the 1st main game hold will not occur basically, so the change mode decision table contents concerning the 1st main game pattern of the time saving game state is In the case of a short time (for example, 3 seconds), the fluctuation time may be only one type of content, and in the case of a big hit, the long time (for example, 30 seconds) may be only one type of fluctuation time (time Since the symbol variation of the first main gaming symbol in the shortened gaming state is an irregular symbol variation, there is no problem even if the variation mode determination table contents have a simple configuration). In addition, in order to cause the second main game hold during irregular symbol fluctuation, the fluctuation mode decision table contents concerning the first main game symbol according to the loss of the time reduction gaming state concerned for a short time regardless of the number of hold It may be configured such that the variation aspect of is not selected (for example, every variation time is 5 seconds or more). The number of reservations shown in the figure is not the total number of first main game holding and second main game holding, but in the case of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A, the first main It is the number of game holdings, and in the case of the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B, the second main game holding number.

  Next, FIG. 67 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 1454 (third) to step 1464 (third), and the purpose is to end the probability variation gaming state according to the number of times of variation of the main gaming symbol (in non-probability variation gaming state Transfer). That is, in step 1454 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c to determine whether the counter value is larger than zero. If Yes in step 1454 (third), in step 1456 (third), the specified game control means MP50 subtracts 1 from the count value of the probability variation number counter MP51 c. Next, in step 1458 (third), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c to determine whether the counter value is zero. If Yes in step 1458 (third), in step 1460 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1462 (third), the specified game control means MP50 turns off the main game time short flag in the flag area of the specified game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1464 (third), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the auxiliary game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1470. Even in the case of No at step 1454 (third) or step 1458 (third), the process goes to step 1470. In the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the symbol variation is executed in the probability variation gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state is ended when the count value of the probability variation number counter MP51c becomes 0 (so-called ST). Although it comprises, it is not limited to this, for example, it is constituted so that probability change game state may not be ended by the number of times of symbol change (it may be ended at the time of winning a special game), and the big hit concerning the 1st main game The rate at which the big hit pertaining to the second main game becomes the long open big hit is higher than the rate at which the long open big hit is large, and even if the short open big hit also exists in the big hit pertaining to the second main game Good.

  Next, FIG. 68 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference with this embodiment is step 1611 (third), step 1700 (third) and step 1650 (third), that is, after setting the special game start display instruction command in step 1608, or When the special game execution flag is on in step 1610, in step 1611 (third), the special game control means MP30 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the round currently being executed is a sorting game It is determined whether or not an execution round (a round in which the second large winning opening C20 having the specific area C22 is to be opened, and in this example, 2R · 4R). If Yes in step 1611 (third), in step 1700 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes a distribution game execution process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1611 (third), the process proceeds to step 1612. Further, after setting the special game end display instruction command in step 1638, in step 1650 (third), the special game control means MP30 executes the game state determination processing after the end of the special game, which will be described later. It shifts to processing (processing of step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution processing according to the subroutine of step 1700 (third) of FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1702, the distribution game execution control means MP 36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB 20 b and determines whether the distribution game in progress flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1702, the process proceeds to step 1716. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b in step 1704, and the stopped main game symbol is a long opening symbol (7A · 4B · · · 5B and 7B, and it is determined whether or not the second main game jackpot symbols are all long open symbols). In the case of Yes in step 1704, in step 1706, the distribution game execution control means MP36 is a long opening pattern (for example, opening for 30 seconds, as the opening pattern of the second big winning opening C20 having the specific area C22, An open pattern designed to approximately enter the ball into the specific area C22 is set, and the process proceeds to step 1710. In the case of No in step 1704, in step 1708, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens a short opening pattern (for example, opening for 0.1 seconds) as the opening pattern of the second big winning opening C20 having the specific area C22. And set an open pattern designed to make the non-entering ball into the specific area C22 substantially deterministic, and the process moves to step 1710.

  Next, in step 1710, the allotment game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, in step 1712, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the distribution game in progress flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1714, the allotment game execution control means MP36 opens the second large winning opening C20 with the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1716.

  Next, in step 1716, the allotment game execution control means MP36 checks the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and determines whether or not the predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have won in the second large winning opening C20. Do. In the case of Yes in step 1716, the process proceeds to step 1720. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1716, the allotment game execution control means MP36 determines in step 1718 whether or not the open period (set open pattern) of the second large winning opening C20 is ended. In the case of Yes in step 1718, the process proceeds to step 1720. Next, in step 1720, the allotment game execution control means MP36 closes the second large winning opening C20. Next, in step 1722, the sorting game execution control means MP36 turns off the sorting game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1724, the distribution game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the execution round of the distribution game. In the case of Yes in step 1724, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b in step 1726, and shifts to step 1728 . Also in the case of No at step 1724, the process proceeds to step 1728. Next, in step 1728, the allotment game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the execution round of the allotment game), and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1634). Also in the case of No in step 1718, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1634).

  Next, FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 (third) of FIG. 68 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1662, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game probability change transfer reservation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1662, in step 1664, the specified game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change transfer reservation flag in the flag area of the specified game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, at step 1666, the specific game control means MP50 sets the probability variation counter MP51c a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example). Next, in step 1668, the specified game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specified game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1672. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1662, in step 1670, the specific game control means MP50 sets the time reduction number counter MP52c a predetermined number of times (50 times in this example), and shifts to step 1672.

  Next, in step 1672, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1674, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game time short flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1997).

  Next, FIG. 71 is a main flowchart of the sub control substrate S side (in particular, the sub main control unit SM side) in the third embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2010 (third) and step 2850 (third), that is, after the above-described decorative symbol display content determination process is executed in step 2200, step 2010 (third) Then, the secondary control board S refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2010 (third), the process proceeds to step 2300. In the case of No, in step 2850 (third), the sub control board S performs a decorative symbol display control process during time saving, which will be described later. Execute and move to step 2400.

  Next, FIG. 72 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 of FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. The difference with this embodiment is step 2230 (third) and step 2800 (third), that is, after turning off the symbol content determination permission flag in step 2204, in step 2230 (third), The drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state. If Yes in step 2230 (third), the process proceeds to step 2206. If No in step 2230 (third), the graphic display content determining means SM21n sets the first device to be described later. The figure content determination process is executed, and the process shifts to step 2208. The process of step 2218 is not executed in the third embodiment (a symbol content determination flag does not exist). In the third embodiment, the first decorative symbol is configured in three rows of left, middle, and right rows, and an effective line (a line that becomes effective when the same number pattern is arranged) is 1 A line is a big hit if the same number pattern is aligned with the effective line (conversely, if the same number pattern is not aligned with the effective line, it is lost). In addition, in the left row, middle row, right row (or in the middle row), only the number symbol can be stopped (temporary stop) (the above-mentioned "special symbol" does not stop, or the appearance frequency itself is extremely high. It is configured such that it is possible to temporarily stop in the middle of symbol fluctuation (or the probability of temporarily stopping is extremely low). Also, the second decorative symbol is configured in three rows of left, middle, and right rows, and the effective line (line in which the same pattern is effective to line up) is one line, and is the same as the effective line It means a big hit if the numeral patterns of the are aligned (inversely, if the same numeral pattern does not align with the effective line, it means a loss). In addition, in the left row, middle row, right row (or in the middle row), only the number symbol can be stopped (temporary stop) (the above-mentioned "special symbol" does not stop), and in the middle of symbol variation It is configured to be able to temporarily stop.

  Next, FIG. 73 is a flowchart of the time-of-day-first-first drawing content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2800 (third) of FIG. 72 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2802, the figure display content determination means SM 21 n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM 11 b to determine whether or not the first decorative symbol is currently stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2802, in step 2804, the 2nd main game reserve content (especially, the result of the winning and the change time) related to the symbol variation (variation of the main gaming symbol) Check the 2nd main game hold content (especially fluctuation time) which becomes the first to 2nd digest order, that is, the 2nd main game hold content (especially success / failure result and fluctuation time) excluding the 3rd hold . Next, in step 2806, the figure display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not there is a suspension (including the symbol variation) which is a variation time of at least a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) related to the confirmed suspension. The first decorative pattern is referred to the first pattern variation mode determination table based on the digesting order of the suspension (including the symbol variation) which causes a variation time of a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) or more. Determine the variation mode.

  Here, the right stage in the same drawing is an example of the time-short-day first appearance variation mode determination table in the third embodiment. As shown in this table, in the third embodiment, when the first decorative symbol is stopped (timing of step 2806), the second main game hold number, the second main game symbol variation and the second main The fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol is configured to be determined based on the fluctuation time relating to the game hold. In addition, as described above, of the variation modes of the second main game symbol, "b0 (1 second)" is short variation, and other than "b0 (1 second)" is long variation.

  Specifically, when there are two or more second main game hold, it is determined whether or not there is a long change hold between the symbol change, the first hold and the second hold. When there is no suspension of long fluctuations, the fluctuation time of three fluctuation of the second main game symbol is the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, the fluctuation time when the second main game hold is 3 and the second main game hold number is "1 to 3", "the change: 1 second, 1st: 1 second, 2" In the case of the eyes: 1 second, the third: 1 second, the variation time of the first decorative symbol when the second main game holding number is maintained “1 to 3” is “the relevant variation” and “the variation”. It becomes 3 seconds of the sum of "the first piece" and "the second piece", and the first decorative symbol will also be stopped at the same time (or almost simultaneously) with the change stop of the main game symbol related to the second hold. . In addition, the second decorative symbol is configured to stop simultaneously (or substantially simultaneously) with the change stop of the main game symbol in each change.

  On the other hand, if there is more than one second main game hold, and if there is a long change hold on any of the symbol change, the first hold, and the second hold, the earliest. The fluctuation time until the fluctuation of the main gaming symbol related to the hold which becomes the long fluctuation of the order of digestion becomes the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, the fluctuation time when the second main game hold is 3 and the second main game hold number is "1 to 3", "the change: 1 second, 1st: 10 seconds, 2" In the case of the eyes: 1 second, the third: 1 second, the variation time of the first decorative symbol when the second main game holding number is maintained “1 to 3” is “the relevant variation” and “the variation”. The first decorative symbol is also stopped at the same time (or substantially simultaneously) with the change stop of the main game symbol related to the first hold, which is a long change.

  In addition, when the number of the second main game hold is 1 or less, it is determined whether or not there is a hold with a long fluctuation until the final settlement order (including the symbol fluctuation), and a long fluctuation If there is no hold of the second main gaming symbol, the variation time of the second main gaming symbol, which is the sum of the symbol variation and all the suspension, becomes the variation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, in the case where the second main game hold is 1 and the second main game hold number maintains "1 to 3", the change time is "the change: 1 second, 1st: 1 second". The variation time of the first decorative symbol when the second main game reserve number maintains "1-3" is 2 seconds of the total of "the variation" and "the first one", The first decorative symbol will also be stopped at the same time (or substantially simultaneously) with the change stop of the main game pattern relating to the suspension of the eyes.

  On the other hand, if there is one or less second main game hold, and if there is a long change hold before the final close order (including the symbol variation), the earliest order of the order The fluctuation time until the fluctuation of the main game symbol related to the hold that becomes the long fluctuation becomes the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol. For example, in the case where the second main game hold is 1 and the second main game hold number maintains "1 to 3", the change time is "the change: 1 second, 1st: 10 seconds". The variation time of the first decorative symbol when the number of the second main game hold is "1-3" is 11 seconds of the sum of "the variation" and "the first one", and the long variation is At the same time as (or substantially simultaneously with) the change stop of the main game symbol related to the first hold of the first decoration symbol will also be stopped.

  In the third embodiment, the variation time of the first decorative symbol is determined at the timing of step 2806, that is, the timing after the reserve digestion, but the invention is not limited thereto. At the timing, the second main game hold information may be confirmed to determine the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol.

  Next, in step 2808, the figure display content determination means SM 21n refers to the hold information confirmed in step 2804 and determines whether or not there is a hold that will be a big hit in the confirmed second main game hold. In the case of Yes in step 2808, in step 2810, the clothing display content determination means SM21 n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol based on the information on the stop symbol of the main gaming symbol pertaining to the hold to be the big hit. Transition to 2814. On the other hand, if the result of step 2808 is No, in step 2812, the architectural display content determination means SM21 n determines the stop symbol of the first decorative symbol in the losing order, and proceeds to step 2814. In the process of step 2812, the stop pattern of the first decorative symbol is reached by the variation time of the first decorative symbol (the stop symbols of the left row and the right row are the same, for example, “4 · 6 ··· It may be configured to determine whether it is 4 ") or whether the stop pattern of the left row and the right row is not the same, for example," 4 · 6 · 3 ". Next, in step 2814, the drawing display content determination means SM21 n turns on the first symbol content determination flag in the time display, which is in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21 b, and performs the next process (step 2208) Move to Also in the case of No at step 2802, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing at step 2208).

  Although not shown, in the third embodiment, in the time-saving gaming state, the game will mainly proceed on the second main gaming side (in order to advance the game by right-handling, the second Because only the symbol change on the main game side is executed, the first main game hold will not basically occur, but the first main game hold occurred when the player executes a left strike etc. In such a case, it is desirable that the first decorative symbol has the same variation time as the main gaming symbol until the variation relating to the first main game holding is over.

  Next, FIG. 74 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process during time saving according to the subroutine of step 2850 (third) of FIG. 71 in the third embodiment. First, at step 2852, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not the variation of the main game pattern has started. In the case of Yes in step 2852, in step 2854, the decorative symbol display control means SM 21 turns on a symbol variation in progress flag in the flag area of the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM 21 b. Next, in step 2856, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the first appearance variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second appearance variation time management timer SM21t-2, and proceeds to step 2858. On the other hand, also in the case of No at step 2852, the processing shifts to step 2858.

  Next, in step 2858, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether the symbol changing flag is on or not. In the case of Yes at step 2858, at step 2860, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer values of the first clothing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-1 and the second clothing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2862, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the graphic display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the first decorative symbol is being stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2862, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts variable display of the first decorative symbol in step 2864, and proceeds to step 2866. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2862, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative symbol at step 2865, and shifts to step 2866.

  Next, at step 2866, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 variably displays the second decorative symbol. Next, in step 2868, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 appropriately executes image display such as temporary stop display, notice image display, reach image display and the like related to the change of the main game symbol that has been determined. The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed as a temporary stop in the time-saving gaming state, but are not configured to stop temporarily in a stop mode such as a "special symbol" or a pseudo run symbol. In addition, as a specific example of temporary stop, the first decorative symbol is reach by the symbol change which becomes reach change for a long time (for example, 30 seconds or more) (the left row and the right row are temporarily stopped) ) May be configured to temporarily stop the second decorative symbol, or may be configured to temporarily stop the first decorative symbol as pseudo continuous fluctuation before the first decorative symbol reaches a reach. .

  Next, in step 2870, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b to determine whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2870, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the costume display related information temporary storage means SM21b in step 2872 to determine whether or not the stop timing of the first decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 2872, at step 2874, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 finalizes and displays the first decorative symbol. Next, in step 2876, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the first appearance variation time management timer SM21t-1 and shifts to step 2880. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2872, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 continues the variable display of the first decorative symbol at step 2878, and shifts to step 2880.

  Next, in step 2880, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 finalizes and displays the second decorative symbol. Next, in step 2882, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the second appearance variation time management timer SM21t-2 and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2400). Also in the case of No in step 2858 or step 2870, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400).

  Here, the upper part of the same drawing is a time-shortened decorative symbol fluctuation image figure, and illustrates an example of the action concerning the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the third embodiment. First, with the "main game symbol fluctuation start state", the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) starts to change at the timing when the main game symbol (especially, the second main game symbol) starts to change. It is displayed whether or not. In addition, the part currently displayed by the oblique line has shown that a decorative symbol (1st decorative symbol) is changing. In addition, it is displayed whether or not the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) stop moving at the timing when the main game symbol (especially, the second main game symbol) stops moving. In addition, the part currently displayed by the oblique line has shown that a decorative symbol (1st decorative symbol) is changing. In this way, the second decorative symbol starts changing and stops changing at the same (or substantially the same) timing as the change of the main game symbol (in particular, the second main game symbol) (according to the change of the main game symbol) The second decorative symbol is configured to start and stop fluctuating every three changes of the main gaming symbol (in particular, the second main gaming symbol). That is, the first decorative symbol is configured such that one symbol fluctuation can be executed over a plurality of fluctuation periods of the main gaming symbol (and the second decorative symbol).

  By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, the variation time of the first decorative symbol is determined based on the number of second main game reservations reserved and the variation time. By configuring the fluctuation time of the first decorative symbol to be the value of the fluctuation time of the second main gaming symbol a plurality of times of fluctuation, it is possible to play the game as if the fluctuation of the main gaming symbol of a plurality of times is a single fluctuation. It is possible to show to the person, and the number of times of fluctuation of the main gaming symbol which is the termination condition of the probability fluctuation gaming state as in the third embodiment is a large number of times (200 in this example). For example, it is possible to show the player to be 100 times), and it is possible to reduce that the progress of the game becomes boring continuously because the lost change in the probability change gaming state is continuous and the probability change game The jackpot probability in the state is actually So that the can feel like the remote has risen.

  In the third embodiment, the second decorative symbol can be determined and stopped three times in a period in which the first decorative symbol is determined and stopped once, but the number of determined stops of the second decorative symbol can be determined. The maximum number of 3 times is a value smaller than 4 times the second main game holding upper limit number (If the second main game holding upper limit number is exceeded, the middle of the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol Because the second main game hold may be completely digested).

  In addition, you may change the board surface structure of 3rd Embodiment, for example, when right-handed execution is performed with the auxiliary game start opening H10 and the 2nd main game start opening B10, the game ball passes almost certainly. It arranges so that it may overlap vertically on the route which becomes (the auxiliary game start opening H10 is arranged on the upper side seeing from the player), almost all the game balls which flowed down the route and passed the auxiliary game start opening H10, It may be configured to be able to enter the second main game start port B10. When configured as such, in the time-saving game state, in the period from when the game ball passes the auxiliary game start port H10 to when it enters the second main game start port B10, Since it is desirable that the change start → the change end of the auxiliary game symbol → the opening of the second main game start opening electric role B11d "," the change time of the auxiliary game symbol 0.2 seconds, the second main game start opening electric It is preferable to set it as the open | release aspect of character B11d 6 second opening-> closed. In addition, in such a configuration, the second main game to prevent the game ball from entering a large amount into the second main game start port B10 when executing right hitting in the time-saving gaming state It is desirable that the number of winning balls of the starting opening B10 be one (the number of winning balls of the first main game starting opening A10 is three).

  In the third embodiment, the second main game hold content is confirmed while the first decorative symbol is stopped, and the fluctuation time relating to the next fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is determined. When the hold that causes the length change of the main gaming symbol exists by the second digesting order, the first decorative symbol is also simultaneously stopped when the symbol change related to the hold that the length change is stopped. Therefore, the variation time of the first decorative symbol may not depend on the number of reservations at the start of the variation of the first decorative symbol, and the first variation of the next variation is due to the retention occurring during the variation of the first decorative symbol. The variation time of the decorative pattern is configured to be different.

  In the third embodiment, as described above, when there are two or more second main game hold, long change to any of the symbol change and the first hold and the second hold. If there is a hold, the change time to the change of the main game symbol related to the hold that becomes the longest change in the order of digestion is configured to be the change time of the first decorative symbol, and If there is no hold with long variation in any of the said symbol variation and the 1st and 2nd pending, the variation time of 3 variations of the second main game symbol is the variation of the first decorative symbol Although it is configured to be time, for example, the fluctuation time when the second main game hold is 3 and the second main game hold number is maintained “1 to 3” is “the change: 1 second In the case of 1st: 1 second, 2nd: 1 second, 3rd: 1 second, the second main game hold number is “1 to 3”. The variation time of the first decorative symbol in the case of holding is scheduled to be 3 seconds of the "variation", the "first" and the "second", but the second main game hold is "1 to For example, when the actual fluctuation time becomes "the fluctuation: 1 second, 1st: 1 second, 2nd: 5 seconds" without being maintained "3 pieces", the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol Time will be 7 seconds of the sum of "the said fluctuation", "the 1st piece", and "the 2nd piece", and the fluctuation time of the 1st decoration pattern may differ according to the existence of additional reservation occurrence.

  In the third embodiment, the second main game hold content is confirmed while the first decorative symbol is stopped, and the fluctuation time relating to the next fluctuation of the first decorative symbol is determined, but this is the case. While stopping, the effect relating to the first decorative symbol may be determined. For example, when “the effect that lightning runs” is executed on the effect display device SG at the start of the change due to the first decorative symbol change Then, while the first decorative symbol variation is stopped, confirm the subsequent variation content of the second decorative symbol (or the variation content of the second main game symbol), and It may be determined whether or not to execute the “rendering effect” again. In addition, the more the "representation where lightning runs", the more likely it is that the first decorative symbol fluctuation (or the main gaming symbol fluctuation included in the first decorative symbol fluctuation) relating to the effect will be a big hit in the expectation. It is desirable to be configured to be high. In addition, although the timing which confirms the fluctuation content of the said 2nd decoration symbol (or the fluctuation content of the 2nd main game symbol) may be changed, when it confirms to the fluctuation start timing of the 1st decoration symbol, in the said timing When it is confirmed at the fluctuation stop timing of the first decorative symbol or the timing of the end of the fluctuation while only the fluctuation contents relating to the second main game hold can be confirmed, the first occurred during the fluctuation period of the first decorative symbol (2) Since it is possible to confirm the contents of change of the main game reserve, it is desirable that the confirmation timing be after the end of the change of the first decorative symbol.

Fourth Embodiment
Here, in the embodiment described above, a configuration is described in which two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the effect display device, but such a configuration is the implementation described above. It is not limited only to the configuration of the form. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is taken as a fourth embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, in the gaming situation where a right hit (a launch mode of firing game balls toward the right side of the board) is to be executed, a right hit indication indicating that a right hit should be executed. And a right-handed display control means SM27 which controls display control of

  First, FIG. 75 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub control substrate S in the fourth embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is the step 3400 (fourth), that is, when the execution of (b) which is the repetitive processing routine of the sub main control unit SM is started, the step 3400 (fourth) The sub control board S executes a right-handed instruction display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2100.

  Next, FIG. 76 is a flowchart of right-turning instruction display control processing according to the subroutine of step 3400 (fourth) of FIG. 75 in the fourth embodiment. First, at step 3402, the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current game state is the time-saving game state. In this example, although it was determined in step 3402 whether or not the time-saving gaming state is determined, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a state, whether it is a probability variation gaming state and a non-time shortening gaming state, etc.). In the case of Yes at step 3402, the process moves to step 3406.

  In the case of No in step 3402, in step 3404 the right-handed display control means SM27 refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game is currently being executed. In the case of Yes in step 3404, the right-handed display control means SM 27 sets a command for displaying the right-handed instruction display on the effect display device SG in step 3406 and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2100). Here, the upper right part of the same figure is a display image diagram of a right-handed indication display. As shown in the figure, the right-handed instruction display is displayed on the effect display device SG, and it is configured to notify the player that the game should be progressed by right-handling at present. Since it is important for the player to recognize whether or not to hit the right, the right hit indication is configured to increase the priority of the display priority (details will be described later). It should be noted that basically the display displayed on the effect display device SG always at all times such as the second decorative symbol, the hold display (including the first hold display and the second hold display) described later is the right-handed indication display It may be configured not to overlap.

  It should be noted that the right-handed display mode in each gaming state or situation may always be the same display mode even if the gaming state or situation (such as when special gaming is in progress and special gaming is not in progress) is different, The display mode may be different (for example, different in size, etc.) depending on the state or situation. When the display mode is configured to be different, for example, the display mode of the right-handed instruction display may be different depending on the opening mode of the big winning opening during the big hit, for example, The right-handed indication display in the big hit where the opening mode is all long open is taken as the relatively large first display pattern, and the right-handed indication display in the big hit when all the open aspects of the big winning opening become short open is relatively small The second display pattern and the right-handed instruction display in the big hit during which the long opening and the short opening are mixed as the opening mode of the large winning opening is a relatively large first display pattern in the round where the large opening is long opening In the round where the special winning opening becomes short open, it may be configured to advance while switching the right-handed instruction display so as to have a relatively small second display pattern.

In the case where the first rightward display with a relatively small display area and the second rightward display with a relatively large display area can be displayed as a rightward display as shown below: It may be configured.
(1) The first right-handed instruction display is displayed in the right-handed situation (for example, time-saving gaming state), and the left-handed hand is hit in the right-handed situation. If the machine detects (for example, in the time-saving game state, when the game ball enters three balls into the first main game start opening A10, which can be hit by left strike), the second right strike indication is displayed Is displayed for a predetermined time (the first right-handed indication display remains displayed).
(2) The first right-handed instruction display is displayed near the four corners (for example, the upper right) of the effect display device SG, and the second right-handed instruction display is displayed near the center of the effect display device SG. In addition, the display area of the first right-handling indication display and the display area of the second right-handling indication display do not overlap. Note that the display area for the first right-handed instruction display may overlap with the display area for the second right-handed instruction display, and in such a case, the display priority for the second right-handed instruction display may be configured. You may comprise so that the display priority of 1st right hit instruction | indication display may become higher than degree.
(3) The display priority in the effect display device SG is "the first right-turning instruction display → the second right-turning instruction display → the notice effect → the decorative symbol in motion" from the higher ("the second right-turning display Instruction display → first right-turn instruction display → notice effect → decorative symbol during variation)), for example, when the display region of the second right-turn instruction indicator overlaps with the display region of the decorative symbol during variation The second right-handed indication display is displayed on the front (visible).

Further, in the case where the display mode of the right-handed instruction display may be different depending on the gaming state or the situation, the following configuration may be made.
(1) During small hit execution, the right hitting indication display is relatively small (for example, one arrow etc.) display mode, and the display mode is different from the case where the small hit is not executed.
(2) The probability change gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state when the special game is not in progress, the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and non time shortening game state when the special game is not in progress and the special game is being executed There is a non-time saving gaming state.
(3) The non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state and the probability fluctuation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state are included as the time shortening gaming state.
(4) The right strike instruction display is not displayed between the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state and the probability fluctuation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state when the special game is not under execution On the other hand, while the special game is being performed, a right-handed instruction display is displayed (a display prompting for a left-handed display is not displayed).
(5) In the time-saving gaming state, a right-handed instruction display is displayed (a display prompting for left-handed driving is not displayed).
(6) The non-time shortening gaming state is configured such that the first right hitting indication display and the second right hitting indication display described above can be displayed regardless of whether it is the non-time shortening gaming state or the time shortening gaming state In the time-saving gaming state, the display mode of the first right-handed instruction display is different, but the display mode of the second right-handed instruction display is the same.
(7) The display prompting the left strike is a predetermined period (for example, a situation where it should strike left for a predetermined period after the situation where it should strike left, and for a predetermined period of time) Is displayed for a predetermined period of time after detection of a right-handed shot, such as when there is a game ball entered) (it becomes non-displayed after a predetermined period has passed), while The period in which the display is always displayed or the right-handed instruction display is displayed is longer than the predetermined period.

  In the case of No at step 3404, the right-handed display control means SM 27 sets a command for deleting the right-handed instruction display at step 3408 and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2100). In step 3408, if the right-handed instruction display is not displayed, the process is not executed.

  Next, FIG. 77 is an image diagram according to the display mode and display position of the decorative symbol in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, it is illustrated what kind of display mode and display position will be the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol by the combination of the gaming state and the background effect. The four display examples shown in the figure all illustrate the situation where the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) related to "7A", which is the big hit symbol on the first main game side, are stopped. ing. First, in the upper left part of the figure, the case where the gaming state is the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the background effect being executed is the "daytime stage" is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is an arithmetic numeral "777", and the display position is such that three numerals are arranged in a straight horizontal line. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is an arithmetic numeral "777", and the display position is such that three numerals are arranged in a straight horizontal line. Next, in the upper right part of the figure, the case where the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the background effect being executed is the "daytime stage" is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is "Chinese characters" and the display position is a convex shape, and three numbers are arranged in a convex shape. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is an arithmetic numeral "777", and the display position is such that three numerals are arranged in a straight horizontal line. In addition, when the background effect being performed is "daytime stage", the display color of the first decorative symbol is "black" for both "777" and "77/77". The display color of the second decorative symbol is "black" in the case of "777" and in the case of "77."

  Next, in the lower left part of the figure, the case where the gaming state is the non-probability fluctuation gaming state and the background effect being executed is the “night stage” is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is an arithmetic numeral "777", and the display position is an oblique straight line in which three numerals are arranged. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is an arithmetic numeral "777", and the display position is such that three numerals are arranged in a straight horizontal line. Next, in the lower right of the figure, the case where the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the background effect being executed is the “night stage” is illustrated. In such a case, the display mode of the first decorative symbol is a Chinese numeral “77” and the display position is a concave shape in which three numbers are arranged. In addition, the display mode of the second decorative symbol is an arithmetic numeral "777", and the display position is such that three numerals are arranged in a straight horizontal line. In addition, when the background effect being executed is "night stage", the display color of the first decorative symbol is "white" for both "777" and "77." The display color of the second decorative symbol is "black" in the case of "777" and in the case of "77."

Thus, in the figure,
(1) The display mode of the first decorative symbol is different when the gaming state is different.
(2) The display mode of the first decorative symbol is different when the background effect is different.
(3) The display position of the first decorative symbol is different when the gaming state is different.
(4) The display position of the first decorative symbol is different when the background effect is different.
(5) The display mode of the second decorative symbol does not differ even if the gaming state is different.
(6) The display mode of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effects are different.
(7) The display position of the second decorative symbol does not differ even if the gaming state is different.
(8) The display position of the second decorative pattern does not differ even if the background effect is different.
It is configured as.

  Moreover, when it is comprised so that the display mode of a 1st decorative symbol may differ by background production or a game state being different, as shown in FIG. 98 mentioned later, the display mode of a 1st decorative symbol is a pattern such as a number and a character. And the display mode of the first decorative symbol may be made different by making the design pattern different (in the case of numbers, Chinese numerals and arithmetic numerals). They may be different or identical). Also, the display mode may be different depending on whether or not the pattern is attached. In addition, as a configuration that can indicate the gaming state after the big hit end when the big hit by the display color of the numbers of the decorative symbol, the big hit was started by arranging three numbers whose display color is green. In this case, it is not definite whether or not it will become a probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit end, but if a big hit is started by aligning three numbers whose display color is red, after the big hit end For example, in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, “3” is green and “7” is red, while in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, for example, in the probability fluctuation gaming state "3" and "7" may be configured to be red ("3" has the same property as "7" in the probability variation gaming state). In addition, the difference in the nature of green and red is that when a big hit is started by stopping the green decorative symbol, the big hit of 8 rounds (or 8 rounds or more) is started. As a result, when the big hit is started by stopping the red decorative symbol, the number of execution rounds may be configured to start the big hit of 16 rounds, and the green decorative symbol has become reach. In the case where the percentage of the symbol variation is a big hit is 10%, if the red decorative symbol is a reach, even if the percentage of the symbol variation is a big hit is 50%. Good. In addition, when the display mode of the first decorative symbol is configured to be different due to the background rendering or the gaming state being different, the display mode is made to differ depending on whether the character is attached to the number of the first decorative symbol. For example, in the non-probability fluctuation gaming state, while the character is not attached to "7" of the first decorative symbol, in the probability fluctuation gaming state, "7" of the first decorative symbol It may be configured that the character of "SUPER" is attached.

  Next, FIG. 78 is an image diagram according to the display area of the decorative symbol in the fourth embodiment. In the same figure, it illustrates about the field where the 1st decoration design and the 2nd decoration design may be displayed with effect indicator SG. In the fourth embodiment, as shown in the upper left of the figure, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed around the central portion of the display area SG10, and the second decorative symbol is variably displayed around the upper left portion of the display region SG10. It is configured to be As a range of the display area SG10 in which the decorative symbol in consideration of the execution of the SP reach effect or the execution of the big hit may be displayed, the second decorative symbol is like the upper right row in the figure, and the first decorative symbol There is a range like the lower right of the drawing. As illustrated, in the fourth embodiment, the area where the first decorative symbol can be displayed is larger than the area where the second decorative symbol can be displayed. In the fourth embodiment, the second decorative symbol is configured not to move during the variable display, while the first decorative symbol moves during the variable display (for example, the upper portion of the display area SG10 The moving range of the first decorative symbol is larger than the moving range of the second decorative symbol because the moving range of the first decorative symbol is larger than that of the second decorative symbol.

  Next, FIG. 79 is an image diagram according to the variation display period of the decorative symbol in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol and display when SP reach effect is executed are illustrated. First, since the symbol variation of the main game symbol is executed in the upper left part of the figure, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. Next, in the upper right part of the figure, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol become reach display. Next, in the lower left part of the figure, as the SP reach effect, the battle effect is executed, and while the battle effect is being executed, the player wishes to pay attention to the battle effect (whether the result of the battle effect will be a big hit Display of the first decorative symbol is erased (hidden). On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is continuously displayed with reach display, and when the player wants to confirm the status of the decorative symbol during the battle production, the player can reach by displaying the display of the second decorative symbol. It can be recognized that it is inside. Thereafter, the battle effect is won, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol. Thus, while the display of the first decorative symbol is being erased (during execution of the battle effect) during the change of the main gaming symbol, while the display of the second decorative symbol is always displayed, the first decorative symbol is displayed. The display period of the second decorative symbol is relatively longer than the display period of the symbol. The second decorative symbol may be configured not to be a reach indicator even when the first symbol is a reach indicator. Further, even when the first decorative symbol performs the above-described pseudo continuous variation, the second decorative symbol may be configured not to perform the pseudo continuous variation. In addition, the second decorative symbol may not always be displayed. For example, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed during the period in which the first decorative symbol is displayed, or covers the display area SG10 as a specific effect. If such a large display area effect is executed, the second decorative symbol may be hidden (not visible).

  Next, FIG. 80 is an image diagram according to the decorative symbol to be used in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in the figure, it illustrates about the structure which concerns on the display mode of the decorative symbol applicable to 4th Embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbol is fluctuating, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuatingly displayed. Thereafter, the variation of the first main game symbol is finished, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped at the big hit symbol by stopping the "7 A" which is the big hit symbol as a stop symbol of the first main game symbol. It will be displayed. In addition, the first decorative symbol uses an arithmetic numeral which is a symbol common to the first main game side and the second main game side, and "777" is stopped in this example. Also, for the second decorative symbol, an arithmetic digit is used when the first main game symbol changes, and when the "7A" is stopped, the "777" is stopped.

  Next, in the lower part of the same figure, the second main game symbol is fluctuating, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuatingly displayed. Thereafter, the variation of the second main game symbol is finished, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped at the big hit symbol by stopping the "7B" which is the big hit symbol as a stop symbol of the second main game symbol. It will be displayed. In addition, "777" has stopped the first decorative symbol. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is configured to use an alphabet when the second main game symbol changes, and to stop “AAA” when “7B” stops. Thus, in the first decorative symbol, the symbol used when changing the first main gaming symbol and the symbol used when changing the second main gaming symbol are the same (design of the display area of the symbol and the symbol) The same is true, and it is difficult for the player to distinguish the variation of the first main gaming symbol from the variation of the second main gaming symbol only by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol, the symbol used when changing the first main gaming symbol is different from the symbol used when changing the second main gaming symbol (the design of the symbol to be changed and displayed differently is different) doing). The first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be displayed on the same display device or may be displayed on different display devices. Further, the first hold display and the second hold display, which will be described later, may be displayed on the same display device or may be displayed on different display devices. In addition, when displaying on a different display device also in a decorative symbol or a hold display, any display device may be a liquid crystal display device (having a plurality of liquid crystal display devices) or a liquid crystal display It may be an apparatus and an LED lamp.

  Next, FIG. 81 is an image diagram according to the stop display mode of the decorative symbol in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in the same figure, it illustrates about the structure which concerns on the display mode of the decorative symbol applicable to 4th Embodiment similarly to FIG. First, in the upper part of the figure, the first main game symbol is fluctuating, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuatingly displayed. Thereafter, the variation of the first main game symbol is finished, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped at the big hit symbol by stopping the "7 A" which is the big hit symbol as a stop symbol of the first main game symbol. It will be displayed. In addition, the first decorative symbol uses an arithmetic numeral which is a symbol common to the first main game side and the second main game side, and "777" is stopped in this example. Also, the second decorative symbol uses arithmetic numerals, and "777" has stopped.

  Next, in the lower part of the figure, the first main gaming symbol is changing at a timing different from that of the upper part of the same drawing, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuatingly displayed. After that, the variation of the first main game symbol is finished, and the first decorative symbol and the big hit symbol “7A” (the same big hit symbol as the upper row in the same figure) is stopped as the stop symbol of the first main game symbol. The second decorative symbol will be stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol. The first decorative symbol has stopped at the arithmetic number "333", and the second decorative symbol has stopped at the arithmetic number "777". Thus, while the first decorative symbol has a plurality of stop display modes ("777", "333", etc.) even when the stop symbols of the main gaming symbol are the same, the second decorative symbol is , When the stop symbol of the main game symbol is the same, there is only one type of stop display mode ("777"). In addition, as a specific example of the candidate of the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, first, the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol indicates the stop display mode which suggests that it is a big hit of 16R. Are “333” and “777”, and in the case of the stop display mode that suggests that 8R (or 8R or more) is a big hit, “111” and “555”, 4R (or 4R or more) In the case of the stop display mode which suggests that it is a big hit of "222", "444", "666" and "888". In addition, the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol is only "333" in the case of the stop display mode that suggests that it is a big hit of 16R, and the stop that suggests that it is a big hit of 8R (or more than 8R) In the case of the display mode, it is only "111", and in the case of the stop display mode which suggests that it is a big hit of 4R (or 4R or more), it is only "222". Moreover, as another specific example, the candidate of the stop display mode of the first decorative symbol is suggested to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit (transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state becomes almost definite) , "111", "333", "555", and "777", and do not indicate transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit (the transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state is not definite) 1st The candidates for the stop display mode of the decorative symbol are "222", "444", "666" and "888". In addition, the candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol that suggests transitioning to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit ends (transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state will be almost definite) is only "111". The only candidate for the stop display mode of the second decorative symbol that does not indicate transition to the probability fluctuation gaming state after the big hit ends (it is not deterministic to shift to the probability fluctuation gaming state) is "222".

  Next, FIG. 82 shows an example of display priority in the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the display contents that can be displayed on the effect display device SG are listed, the one with the high display priority is shown in the upper part, and the one with the low display priority is shown in the lower part. In addition, when the display content with high display priority and the display content with low display priority are overlapped and displayed, specifically, for example, when the right-handed instruction display and the first decorative symbol are overlapped and displayed. For the display of the overlapping portion, a right-handed instruction display having a high display priority is displayed on the front side (front layer) (displayed so as to be visible), and the first decorative symbol having a low display priority Is displayed on the back side (rear layer) (hidden in the display of the right-handed instruction display and becomes invisible). In this example, the display priority is high, “error display → right-turn indication display → power saving display → second decoration symbol → notice effect → first decoration symbol → hold display”. Although the display priority may be changed, the display priority is changed for the “error display”, “right-handed display”, and “display during power saving” because the effect on the player's profit is large. It is not desirable. Moreover, although the order of the display priority may be switched between the notice effect and the first decorative symbol and the hold display, the display priority of both the notice effect and the first decorative symbol and the hold display is also the display of the second decorative pattern. It is preferable to be configured to be lower than the priority. In addition, it is desirable to display "right-handed instruction display" at a position not hidden by other display objects (including character YK etc.), and newly display content having higher priority than "right-handed instruction display" When provided, it is preferable that the area where the newly provided display content is displayed does not overlap with the area where the “right-handed indication display” is displayed. In addition, regarding "display during power saving", it is configured not to be displayed during execution of symbol variation.

  Next, FIG. 83 is an image diagram relating to priority in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in the figure, it illustrates about the structure which concerns on the display mode of the decorative symbol applicable to 4th Embodiment, and it becomes a structure different from FIG. 77 mentioned above. First, in the upper part of the figure, the second main game symbol is fluctuating, and under the situation where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuatingly displayed, a right-handed instruction display is displayed (the gaming state is It has become a time-saving gaming state, and in the time-saving gaming state, it has become a game characteristic in which the game is progressed by right-handling). Thereafter, the area in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed overlaps with the area in which the right-handed instruction display is displayed, and the right-handed instruction display is displayed on the front because the priority is higher. Further, the second decorative symbol and the right turn indication display are configured such that the display areas do not overlap.

  Next, in the lower part of the figure, the second main game symbol is fluctuating, and a flock of sheep appears as a notice effect under the situation where the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are fluctuatingly displayed. In the notice effect, the display area of either the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol overlaps, and since the priority is "second decorative symbol> notice effect> first decorative symbol", the sheep are displayed. When the second decorative pattern overlaps with the first decorative symbol, the sheep display is displayed on the front, and when the sheep display and the second decorative symbol overlap, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the front Become. As in the first modification of the fourth embodiment described later, when there are a plurality of hold display areas on the effect display device SG (the hold display on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side) Also in the case where there is a display, the first hold display and the second hold display, etc.), a hold display area SG10 is newly provided in the lower left portion of the display area SG10 in the figure (shown in FIG. Even if the right-handed indication display and the display area SG10 do not overlap, such as setting the hold display in the upper right part of the displayed display area SG10 as the first hold display and the newly provided hold display as the second hold display etc. Good.

  By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, two decoration symbols of the first decoration symbol and the second decoration symbol are displayed on the effect display device SG. By configuring the second decorative symbol to be displayed even when the first decorative symbol is erased, it is possible to make the user-friendly game machine capable of confirming even when the player wants to confirm the status of the decorative symbol. It is possible to make the effect to be shown more noticeable by erasing the display of the first decorative symbol even when it is desired to show the player the effect such as SP reach effect. Also, by configuring the display priority of the second decorative symbol to be greater than that of the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol can be used to check the condition of the decorative symbol when the first decorative symbol is not displayed. It is possible to configure so that a situation in which visual recognition is impossible can not occur easily.

  In the fourth embodiment, the first decorative symbol may be displayed as a combination of three symbols, while the second decorative symbol may be displayed as a single symbol. In addition, the stop display mode for one symbol in the first decorative symbol is four types, and the stop display mode for one symbol in the second decorative symbol is two types, such as one stop for the first decorative symbol The number of display modes may be set to be larger than the number of stop display modes for one symbol of the second decorative symbol. By configuring in such a manner, the second decorative symbol of the second display pattern is more likely than the probability that the stop display aspect of the first decorative symbol (the display aspect of the combination of the three symbols) is continuously the same over a predetermined number of symbol variations. It is possible to configure such that the probability that the stop display mode is continuously the same over a predetermined number of symbol variations is higher. Also, two display areas of "o" and "x" are provided as the display area of the second decorative symbol, and "o" is lit when symbol variation is stopped and displayed with a big hit (or small hit) symbol. It may be configured to display, and when the symbol variation is lost, "x" may be lit and displayed. In addition, when it is configured as such, the display of the second decorative symbol does not move on the display area SG10, and "○" or "×" blinks to notify that symbol variation is in progress. It may be configured as follows. In addition, two display areas of the area of the shape of "o" and the area of the shape of "☆" are provided as the display area of the second decorative pattern, and the shape of "o" is changed when the first main game pattern changes. Perform variable display and stop display in the area of, and configure variable display and stop display in the area of the shape of "☆" when the second main game symbol changes, and "○" or "*" Blinks to notify that the symbol is changing, and when the symbol change is stopped and displayed as a big hit (or small hit) symbol, "○" or "*" is lit and displayed, the symbol When the change is stopped and displayed with the lost symbol, "○" or "☆" may be displayed extinguished, and when configured as such, in the first decorative symbol, the first main symbol The symbol used when the game symbol changes and the symbol used when the second main game symbol changes (The display area of the symbol and the design of the symbol are the same, and it is difficult for the player to distinguish the variation of the first main gaming symbol from the variation of the second main gaming symbol only by visually recognizing the first decorative symbol. For example, "777") may be configured. In addition, in the second decorative symbol, the symbol used when changing the first main gaming symbol and the symbol used when changing the second main gaming symbol are different (areas to be changed display and stop display are different) There are differences in the design of the symbols that change and stop. Further, as described above, in the case where two display areas of the area of the shape of "o" and the area of the shape of "☆" are provided as the display area of the second decorative symbol, the first main game symbol is When the stop display is displayed with the big hit (or small hit) symbol, "O" is lit and displayed, and when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit (or small hit) symbol, "☆" is displayed. It lights up, and when the first main game symbol is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol, "o" is turned off and when the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol, "☆" is displayed. If the first main gaming symbol or the second main gaming symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit (or small hit) symbol as a stop symbol of the first decorative symbol, “333” is configured to display the light off. The stop display can be made in a plurality of stop display modes such as “777” and the like, and the first main game When the handle or the second main game symbols are stopped and displayed in loss pattern, at a plurality of types of stop display mode such as "326" and "761" may be configured to be stopped and displayed. By configuring as such, the number of types of stop display modes of the second decorative symbol is stopped when the main gaming symbol (the first main gaming symbol or the second main gaming symbol) becomes a big hit (or a small hit). While there is only one type of stop display mode to be obtained, and only one type of stop display mode can be stopped when the main game symbol (the first main game symbol or the second main game symbol) is lost, the first decoration The number of types of stop display modes of a symbol is a plurality of types of stop display modes that can be stopped when the main game pattern (the first main game pattern or the second main game pattern) is a big hit (or a small hit) There are multiple types of stop display modes that can be stopped when the game symbol (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) is lost.

(Modification 1 from the fourth embodiment)
Here, in the embodiment described above, a configuration is described in which two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the effect display device, but such a configuration is the implementation described above. It is not limited only to the configuration of the form. Therefore, an example of such a configuration is set as a first modification of the fourth embodiment, and only differences from the fourth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 84 is a main flowchart on the side of the sub control substrate S in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. The point of change from the fourth embodiment is step 3500 (fourth modification 1), that is, in step 2200, the sub control board S executes the decorative symbol display content determination process, and then step 3500 (fourth modification). In 1), the sub control board S executes a decorative symbol display control process, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2400.

  Next, FIG. 85 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 84 in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. The change from the fourth embodiment is step 2118-1 (fourth modification 1) and step 2118-2 (fourth modification 1), that is, in step 2106, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 holds After temporarily storing the information in the hold information temporary storage area, in step 2116, after the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag, or in step 2111 the drawing hold information display control means SM22 When the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main side has not been received, in step 2118-1 (fourth modification 1), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 sets the drawing hold counter value as the first hold display. The same number of reserved images (reserved display of the lamp shape on the effect display device SG) are lit and displayed on the effect display device SG. Next, in step 2118-2 (fourth modification 1), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the drawing hold counter value as a second hold display on the effect display device SG as a numerical value, and It shifts to processing (processing of step 2200). Note that the display mode of the second hold display is not limited to the mode of this example, and may be displayed by a combination of lighting and blinking in an LED lamp different from the display on the effect display device SG, etc. It is sufficient if the hold indication and the second hold indication are different.

  Next, FIG. 86 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display control processing according to the subroutine of step 3500 (fourth modification 1) of FIG. 84 in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, at step 3502, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3502, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21b in step 3504. Next, in step 3506, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on a symbol variation flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 3508, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 3510. Also in the case of No in step 3502, the process proceeds to step 3510.

  Next, at step 3510, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the symbol variation flag is on or not. In the case of Yes in step 3510, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the dressing fluctuation time management timer SM 21t in step 3512. Next, in step 3514, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the variation start timing of the decorative symbol based on the dressing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the dressing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has reached. In the case of Yes in step 3514, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variation display command of the decorative symbol in step 3516 (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control processing of step 2999). , And move on to step 3526.

  On the other hand, if the result of step 3514 is No, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is decorated based on the dressing fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21b in step 3518. It is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3518, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the decorative symbol in step 3520 (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub sub control unit SS side And the process proceeds to step 3526.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3518, in step 3522, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25) displays the drawing fluctuation time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Based on the variation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM 25 b), it is determined whether or not the display timing of the advance notice image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 3522, in step 3524, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the notice image or the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999). , And sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and proceeds to step 3526. Also in the case of No at step 3522, the process proceeds to step 3526.

  Next, in step 3526, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol has been stopped and displayed (for example, with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game from the main control board M side It is determined whether or not the information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed is received). In the case of Yes in step 3526, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (decision display command) of the decorative symbol in step 3528 (sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control processing of step 2999) Be done). Next, in step 3530, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the dressing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 3532, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2400) Do. Also in the case of No in step 3510 or step 3526, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 87 is an image diagram according to a change of the hold display in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, the first hold display and the second hold display corresponding to each of the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed in the upper left part of FIG. The number of reservations is two for the first main gaming side and zero for the second main gaming side. In addition, the decoration design which corresponds to the 1st main game side is stopped and displayed. After that, the first main game is suspended and the next symbol change is started, so that the first hold display related to the first main game and the second hold display related to the first main game change (The display shows that the number of reservations on the first main game side is two, changing to the indication that it is one). After that, with the same symbol variation, the hold on the first main game side occurs (the game ball enters the first main game start port A10), and the number of holds on the first main game side changes. 1) The 1st hold display on the main game side and the 2nd hold display on the 1st main game side change (the display to the effect that the number of 1st main game side hold is 1 from 2 displays Would be As described above, the first hold display and the second hold display are display modes at the hold digest timing when symbol variation is started and at the hold occurrence timing when the game ball enters the main game start opening. Are configured to change.

  Next, at the middle left, the first hold display and the second hold display corresponding to each of the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. The number of reservations is two for the first main gaming side and zero for the second main gaming side. In addition, a decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game side is variably displayed. After that, a hold change presentation (a play with which the display mode of the hold may be changed) is executed as the hold prefetching effect during the same change. In addition, as an effect mode of the hold change effect shown in the figure, it is an effect intended for the hold of the first main game side, is the flame on the first hold display and the display mode of the first hold display changes It has become a production to ask whether or not. Thereafter, while the first hold display on the first main game side changes as the rendering result of the hold change effect, the second hold display on the first main game side does not change. As described above, when the hold pre-reading effect is executed, only the first hold display can change the hold display, and the second hold display does not change. Incidentally, even when the hold change effect is executed for the hold of the second main game side, the first hold display of the second main game side may change, while the second hold display of the second main game side is It is configured not to change. Incidentally, it is assumed that the pre-hold presentation effect is executed by the processing exemplified in the second embodiment and the like described above.

As illustrated in the figure, the features of the first hold display and the second hold display are as follows:
(1) When the number of reservations is the same, the display mode of the first suspension display may change, but the display mode of the second suspension display does not change.
(2) The display mode of the first hold display may change without increase or decrease of the number of holds (occurrence of the retention of the hold or occurrence of the hold), while the display manner of the second hold display does not change without increase or decrease of the number of holds.
(3) In the case where an action is performed on a display relating to a hold as a hold change effect to execute an effect in which the display mode of the hold changes, the hold display targeted for the effect is the first hold display, No hold change effect is executed for the second hold display.
It is comprised as mentioned above.

  Next, FIG. 88 is an image diagram according to the hold display for each gaming state in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. In the figure, the presence / absence and display mode of the first hold display and the second hold display in the non-time shortening gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, which can be applied in the first modification from the fourth embodiment An example of the configuration is illustrated. First, in «Example 1» at the top of the figure, the first hold display and the second hold display are displayed in both the non-time shortening gaming state and the time shortening gaming state. The display mode of the first hold display is different between the non-time shortening gaming state and the time shortening gaming state (a first holding display according to the first main gaming side and a first holding display according to the second main gaming side Both are different). In << example 1 >> in the upper part of the figure, the first hold display corresponding to the hold on the first main game side, the first hold display corresponding to the hold on the second main game side, and the first main game side A second hold display corresponding to the hold of the second hold display and a second hold display corresponding to the hold of the second main game side are displayed respectively, that is, on the first main game side and the second main game side, Neither the first pending display (the area where the first pending display is displayed) nor the second pending display (the area where the second pending display is displayed) is shared.

  Next, in << example 2 >> in the upper part of the figure, in the non-time shortening gaming state, the first hold display on the first main game side, the first hold display on the second main game side, and the first main game The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. Also, in the time saving gaming state, the first hold display on the second main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. , The first hold display of the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, the game performance is such that the right hitting is executed in the time saving gaming state, and the second main gaming symbol is fluctuated (the game ball is entered into the second main gaming start port B10) to advance the game. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine (in particular, in the case of a gaming machine where the hold of the second main game is prioritized over the hold of the first main game), the hold of the first main game is the player It may be configured to hide the first hold display on the first main game player side because it is not very important to the player. In addition, even when configured as such, since it is not user-friendly if the player can not recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side, the second reservation display on the first main game side is displayed. It is configured as follows.

  Next, in «Example 3» at the top of the figure, in the non-time shortening gaming state, the first hold display on the first main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second main game The second hold display on the side is displayed, and the first hold display on the second main game side is not displayed. Also, in the time saving gaming state, the first hold display on the second main game side, the second hold display on the first main game side, and the second hold display on the second main game side are displayed. , The first hold display of the first main game side is not displayed. In this way, the game performance is such that the right hitting is executed in the time saving gaming state, and the second main gaming symbol is fluctuated (the game ball is entered into the second main gaming start port B10) to advance the game. In the case of a pachinko gaming machine (in particular, in the case of a gaming machine where the hold of the second main game is prioritized over the hold of the first main game), the hold of the first main game is the player It may be configured to hide the first hold display on the first main game player side because it is not very important to the player. In addition, in the non-time shortening game state, the left is executed, the 1st main game symbol is fluctuated and the game characteristic which advances the game (by making the game ball enter the 1st main game start opening A10) In the case of a pachinko gaming machine (in particular, when the second main game start port B10 does not exist in the flow path of the game ball on which the left strike is performed), the second main game side hold is not very important for the player The first hold display on the second main game side may be hidden. In addition, even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if it is configured that the player can not recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side or the number of reservations on the second main game side. The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are always displayed. In the figure, an example is illustrated in which the configuration relating to the presence or absence of the hold display is different between the non-time shortening gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, but the invention is not limited thereto. The configuration relating to the presence / absence of the suspension display may be different depending on the gaming state, or the configuration relating to the presence / absence of the suspension display may be different because the effect mode is different. In addition, although the display mode of the first hold display is different due to the difference in the gaming state shown in the << Example 1 >>, the display mode of the second hold display is not different in the case of the << Example 2 >> or << Example It is applicable also to the composition of 3 >>.

  Next, FIG. 89 is an image diagram according to the deletion of the hold display in the first modification from the fourth embodiment. First, a first hold display and a second hold display corresponding to each of the first main game side and the second main game side are displayed. Also, the number of reservations is two for the first main game side and zero for the second main game side. In addition, a decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game side is variably displayed. After that, the decorative symbol becomes reach display with the same change, and then the battle effect is executed as SP reach effect with the same change. While the battle effect is being executed, the first hold display erases (non-displays) both the first main game side and the second main game side, while the second hold display corresponds to the first main game side. Any display with the second main gaming side is continuously displayed. As described above, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, the display area SG10 is displayed during the execution of the SP reach effect in which the player pays attention to whether or not the symbol variation being executed is a big hit. In order to occupy it (using most of the display area SG10) and execute the battle effect, the first hold display is deleted. In addition, even in such a configuration, it is not user-friendly if it is configured that the player can not recognize the number of reservations on the first main game side or the number of reservations on the second main game side. The second hold display on the side and the second hold display on the second main game side are always displayed. In the same figure, the first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is not displayed when executing SP reach, but the second Although the configuration in which the hold display (the second hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) remains displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto. The first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is also hidden during the period of 1, or always, but the second hold display (the second hold display) The second hold display on the main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side may be configured to remain displayed. Although the first hold display (the first hold display on the first main game side and the second hold display on the second main game side) is not displayed at the time of executing the SP reach, the second hold display (the first hold display) The configuration in which the second hold display of the main game side and the second hold display of the second main game side may be displayed may be applied at all times during the SP reach execution period, or in the SP reach execution period. It may apply to some periods.

  By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the fourth embodiment, two suspension displays of the first suspension display and the second suspension display are displayed on the effect display device SG With regard to the first hold display, the display mode changes to suggest a big hit expectation for the hold, or the display is erased if the player wants the player to pay attention to the SP reach effect, etc. The amusement of the game can be enhanced by using the display mode (display / non-display) in accordance with the situation and by using it as part of an effect that suggests a big hit or the like. Also, in the second hold display, by always displaying and not changing the display mode, when the player wants to check the current hold number, he can recognize the hold number without causing any doubt. It is configured as follows.

  In addition, in the first modification from the fourth embodiment, it may be configured to display the reserve digest transmission image as exemplified in the third modification from the second embodiment. When configured in such a manner, it may be configured to display the reserve digestion transfer image corresponding to the first reserve display and not to display the reserve digestion transfer image corresponding to the second reserve display. Note that the hold display corresponding to the first hold display is a display mode in which the first hold display and the hold display mode are the same or similar, and, for example, the first hold display is a display of the shape of “o” In addition, when the display color is displayed in one of the display colors "red", "green", "blue", and "white", the reserve digestion transfer image corresponding to the first reserve display is also "○ It is a display of the shape of "", and the structure displayed in any one display color of "red", "green", "blue", and "white" as a display color can be illustrated. The display mode of the first hold display immediately before the hold of the main game side corresponding to the first hold display is digested, and the display mode immediately after the hold of the main game side corresponding to the first hold display is digested. The display mode of the reserve digestion transfer image may be configured to be the same display.

In addition, when it is comprised so that a reserve digestion transmission image may be displayed, you may comprise as follows. In addition, only one may be employ | adopted the following structure, and several components may be combined. In addition, a configuration in which only one configuration is adopted or a configuration in which a plurality of constituent elements are combined, and one or more configurations among the configurations of «Example 1», «Example 2» or «Example 3» in FIG. And may be combined.
(1) In the non-time shortening gaming state, the reserve digest transfer image of the first main game can be displayed, but the reserve digest transfer image of the second main game is not displayed.
(2) In the non-time shortening gaming state, it is possible to display both the reserve digest transmission image on the first main game side and the reserve digest transmission image on the second main game side.
(3) In the time-saving gaming state, the reserve digest transfer image of the second main game can be displayed, but the reserve digest transfer image of the first main game is not displayed.
(4) In the time-saving gaming state, it is possible to display both the reserve digest transfer image on the first main game side and the reserve digest transfer image on the second main game side.
(5) In the non-time shortening gaming state, the reserve digest transmission image can be displayed, but in the time shortening gaming state, the reserve digestion transmission image is not displayed.
(6) The rate at which the reserve digest transfer image is displayed in the time save gaming state is higher than the rate at which the reserve digest transfer image is displayed in the non time save gaming state (for example, the first main game in the non time save gaming state Always show the pending digestive transfer image on the side)
(7) The reserve digest transmission image of the first main game side in the non-time shortening gaming state can change the display mode while the symbol changes.
(8) The display format does not change during symbol fluctuation when the second main game side of the reserve digest transfer image in the non-time shortening gaming state is changed (when the second main game side of the reserve digest transfer image can be displayed).
(9) A time saving game image of the second main gaming side in the time saving gaming state can change the display mode while the symbol changes. However, the second main game side's reserve digest transmission image in the non-time shortening gaming state changes during the symbol fluctuation than the rate at which the first main game side's reserve digest transmission image changes during symbol fluctuation in the non-time shortening gaming state The rate of doing is lower.
(10) In the time saving gaming state, the display mode does not change during the symbol change in the reserve digest transfer image of the first main game side (when the reserve digest transfer image of the second main game side can be displayed).
(11) The reserve digest transmission image is different from the above-mentioned reserve display having two reserve displays such as the first reserve display and the second reserve display. It does not have two reserve digest delivery images, such as images, but only one reserve digest delivery image.
(12) During the SP reach and the like, the first hold display is hidden as shown in FIG. 89 described above, but the hold digestion transmission image remains displayed.
You may comprise as mentioned above. Also, although the above describes the configuration related to the display of the reserve digest transmission image in the non-time shortening gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, “non-time shortening gaming state and time shortening gaming state in the above configuration and "" May be applied to "non-probability variation gaming state and probability variation gaming state" may be applied, or may be applied to "production mode A and presentation mode B".

Fifth Embodiment
Here, in the above-described embodiment, two displays of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol can be displayed on the effect display device SG as the display of the decorative symbol corresponding to one main game symbol. The configuration for simultaneously displaying two decorative symbols on the effect display device SG is not limited to this. Therefore, an example of a configuration in which two decorative symbols are simultaneously displayed on the effect display device SG different from the above-described configuration will be referred to as a fifth embodiment, and only differences from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 90 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a fifth embodiment. As a difference from the second embodiment, a distribution start port unit C50 having a first main game start port A10 and a second main game start port B10 is provided. Although the details of the distribution start port unit C50 will be described later, as shown in the figure, the distribution start port unit C50 is provided with a first main game start port A10 and a second main game start port B10. The game ball flowing down the left side of the game area is configured to be easily guided to any one of the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10. In addition, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area is configured to easily flow down to the vicinity of the second main game start opening electric combination B11 hd attached to the distribution start opening unit C50. In the fifth embodiment, since the second main game start opening electric combination B11hd is configured to be easily opened when the auxiliary game time short flag is on, the time shortening game state (the auxiliary game time short flag is By executing the right strike when it is on), the second main game start opening electric role B11 hd will be opened and the game ball will enter the second main game start opening B10 (the second main game The game ball entered into the distribution start port unit C50 from the vicinity of the start port electric role B11 hd is configured so that it is difficult to enter the first main game start port A10 and is easy to enter the second main game start port B10 ing).

  In the fifth embodiment, as the configuration of the display area SG10 in the effect display device SG, the second decorative symbol display area SG14, which is an area in which the second decorative symbol can be variably displayed, and the first decorative symbol are variably displayed. A first decorative symbol display area SG15 which is an area to be obtained, a common hold display section SG16 for displaying both the first main game side hold and the second main game side hold, and a display relating to the digested hold And a reserve passage route SG17 through which a certain reserve digest indication is to be passed. In addition, the part which is the movable body part for the effect which is driven when the production which tells the player whether or not it becomes the big hit of the SP reach production etc in the upper part of the production display SG is executed etc YK is provided.

  Next, FIG. 91 is an overall view and an operation view of a distribution start port unit C50 according to the fifth embodiment. First, the distribution start port unit C50 is provided below the common entrance C51 and the common entrance C51 where the game ball flowing down the game area D30 can enter, and the game which has flowed down from the common entrance C51 A starting opening distribution member C50y (in this example, a three-legged member which tilts in the left and right direction around a spindle) which regularly distributes balls in the left and right direction, and provided below the starting opening distribution member C50y A first main game start port A10 and a second main game start port B10 provided below the start opening distribution member C50y. The distribution start port unit C50 configured in this way tilts the gaming ball having flowed into the common entrance C51 in the left and right direction of the start port distribution member C50y, as shown by the dotted line box in FIG. It is comprised so that it may guide | induce to either one of 1st main game starting opening A10 and 2nd main game starting opening B10. For example, the case where the starting opening distribution member C50y is performing the leftward tilting operation is referred to as the "first position", and the starting opening distribution member C50y is performing the rightward tilting operation as the "second position". In the case of “position”, the gaming ball having flowed into the common entrance C51 is guided to the first main game starting opening A10 side under the situation where the starting opening distribution member C50y is the “second position”, and The game ball having flowed into the common entrance C51 under the condition that the starting opening distribution member C50y is at the "first position" while the starting opening distribution member C50y is displaced to the "first position" is the second main While being guided to the game start opening B10 side, the start opening distribution member C50y is displaced to the "second position". And in this example, as a tilting operation to the left-right direction of starting opening distribution member C50y is constituted by self weight of the game ball, as a mechanism top, the game ball which flowed in common entrance ball opening C51 is The game ball is alternately distributed to any one of the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 (after distributing one game ball to one side, the other to the other 1 It is designed with the intention of repeating the operation of distributing individual game balls. In the fifth embodiment, since the parallel lottery can be executed, and the first main gaming symbol and the second main gaming symbol are configured to be simultaneously variable, by having the sorting start port unit C50. The first main game side hold and the second main game side hold can be caused to occur substantially equally, and can be frequently changed simultaneously with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol It is done.

  Next, FIG. 92 is a flowchart of a main gaming symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (fifth) of FIG. 5 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 1400 (1) (fifth), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process, which will be described later. Next, in step 1400 (2) (fifth), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 1500). By configuring in this way, the second main game can start changing also when the first main game changes, and when the second main game changes, the first main game changes Can start (so-called parallel lottery).

  Next, FIG. 93 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 92 in the fifth embodiment. In addition, since this processing is substantially the same processing on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Write in parentheses. First, in step 1407-1, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the first (second) change start condition is satisfied. The change start condition is not during special game (or during operation of the condition device), and is not during the first main game symbol change (in the case of processing on the second main game symbol side, the second main game symbol is not during change) ), And there is a reserve of the main game design, and it is a condition that the small hit game is not in progress. That is, since it is possible to execute parallel lottery, there is no problem even if the second main game symbol fluctuates when executing the process relating to the first main game symbol, but the first main game symbol is fluctuating If there is, the variation start condition pertaining to the first main game side is not satisfied.

  Next, at step 1407-2, the game content determination means MN reads the main gaming side random number. Next, in step 1407-3, the game content determination means MN deletes the read main gaming side random number from the hold information and shifts the remaining hold information. Next, in step 1407-4, the game content determination means MN executes a main gaming symbol acceptance lottery based on the main gaming side random number and the gaming state. Next, in step 1407-5, the game content determination means MN determines stop symbols related to the main game symbols based on the main game side random number and the result of the lottery result, and temporarily stores them in the RAM area. Next, in step 1407-6, the game content determination means MN is based on the main gaming symbol equality lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (especially, variation mode lottery random number) The variation mode of the main game symbol is determined and temporarily stored in these RAM areas. Next, in step 1407-7, the game content determination means MN determines information relating to the determined main game symbol and the game state information (command to the side of the sub control board S, symbol change display start instruction command etc.) Set Next, in step 1407-8, the game content determination means MN determines the first main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C1 (the second main game based on the variation aspect) according to the variation time of the main gaming symbol. Set in the symbol variation management timer MP11t-C2) and start the timer. Next, at step 1407-9, the game content determination means MN displays the first main game symbol display portion A21g (second main game symbol display) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). On part B21g), variable display of the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is started. Next, in step 1407-10, the game content determination means MN turns on the first (second) variation flag, and proceeds to step 1407-12. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1407-1, at step 1407-11, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the first (second) variation flag is on. If Yes in step 1407-11, the process proceeds to step 1407-12.

  Next, in step 1407-12, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the fluctuation time of the first main gaming symbol (second main gaming symbol) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1407-12, in step 1407-13, the game content determination means MN is the first main game symbol display part A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variable display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display portion B21g) is stopped, and the display is controlled as the fixed stop symbol, and the process shifts to step 1407-17. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 1407-12, at step 1407-14, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1407-14, the game content determination means MN is the first (second) forced stop execution command (the command to the sub side in step 1407-15, and the first main game side becomes a big hit In the case, the information to forcibly stop the second main game symbol with a loss is transmitted, and the command to transmit the information to forcibly stop the first main game symbol with a loss if the second main game side is a big hit is set (Sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1407-16, the game content determination means MN displays the first main game symbol display area A21g (second main game symbol display) of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The variation display of the main game symbol on the part B 21g) is stopped with the stop symbol being a lost symbol, the display control of the lost symbol is determined as a confirmed stop symbol, and the process shifts to step 1407-17. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, when the first main game symbol is stopped by the big hit symbol, the second main game symbol in motion is forcibly stopped by the loss, and the second main game symbol is the big hit. When stopped by the symbol, the first main game symbol in fluctuation is configured to be forcibly stopped by a lose. In addition, when the first main gaming symbol or the second main gaming symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss, a command to forcibly stop the sub control board S is set immediately before the forcible stop. (The effect when the secondary control board S side receives the command will be described later).

  Next, in step 1407-17, the game content determination means MN sends a command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting information (design confirmation display instruction command) to the effect that symbol variation is complete to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set (sent to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission processing of step 1999). Next, in step 1407-18, the game content determination means MN turns off the first (second) variation flag and shifts to step 1407-19. Next, in step 1407-19, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1407-19, in step 1407-20, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device activation flag, and shifts to step 1450. On the other hand, if the result of step 1407-19 is No, the process proceeds to step 1450 without executing the process of step 1407-20.

  Next, in step 1450, the game content determination means MN executes the aforementioned specific game end determination process, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500). Also in the case of No in step 1407-11 or step 1407-14, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1500).

  Next, FIGS. 94 and 95 are used when determining the variation mode of the main gaming table 3 and the second main gaming symbol used when determining the variation mode of the first main gaming symbol in the fifth embodiment. Main game table 3 to be played. The contents of the table are the same as those of the second embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted. The contents of the effect corresponding to the determined variation mode of the main game symbol will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 96 is a main flowchart of the sub control substrate S side in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2050 (fifth), step 2200 (fifth), step 2350 (fifth), step 2500 (fifth) and step 3300 (fifth), that is, sub When execution of (b), which is a repetitive processing routine of the main control unit SM, is started, in step 2050 (fifth), the sub control board S executes symbol standby display control processing described later, and proceeds to step 2100 Transition. In addition, after the sub control board S executes the suspension information management process at step 2100, the sub control board S executes the decorative symbol display content determination process to be described later at step 2200 (fifth), and shifts to step 2300 Do. Also, after the secondary control board S executes the first decorative symbol display control process in step 2300, the secondary control board S executes a second decorative symbol display control process described later in step 2350 (fifth), It transfers to step 2400. Further, after the secondary control board S executes the special game related display control process at step 2400, the secondary control board S executes a background effect control process to be described later at step 2500 (fifth). Next, in step 3300 (fifth), the sub control substrate S executes a bonus game drive control process described later, and shifts to step 2999.

  Next, FIG. 97 is a flowchart of symbol standby display control processing according to the subroutine of step 2050 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the standby preparation in progress flag (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and stopped display) It is determined whether or not the flag (which can be turned on) is off. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, both of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display control means SM21 newly stop display (the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed) Whether or not the second decorative symbol has become the stop display newly in the situation, or the first decorative symbol has become the stop display anew in the situation where the second decorative symbol has been stop displayed) judge. In the case of Yes in step 2054, in the step 2056, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 is the standby preparation measurement timer SM 28t (increment timer, both the first decoration symbol and the second decoration symbol being stopped are displayed stopped) Start the timer to measure the elapsed time since then. Next, in step 2058, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the standby preparation in progress flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2060. Also in the case of No in step 2052, the processing shifts to step 2060.

  Next, in step 2060, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the standby preparation measurement timer SM 28t, and the timer value becomes the standby execution value (the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the main area will be in the standby state) It is a timer value, and in this example, it is determined whether or not 20 seconds or more. In the case of Yes in step 2060, in step 2062, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the main area in a standby state. The standby state is ended when one of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol starts the variable display. Here, the right part of the same figure is a decorative symbol display area image figure. In the fifth embodiment, in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG, a second decorative symbol corresponding to a first main gaming symbol and a second decorative symbol corresponding to a second main gaming symbol The decorative symbol and the design can be changed at the same time, and one is displayed in the main area and the other is displayed in the sub area. The main area is configured such that the area that can be displayed is larger than that of the sub area. In the fifth embodiment, the decorative symbol displayed in the main area is displayed as a pattern and a number, and the decorative symbol displayed in the sub area is displayed as only a number (number The first decorative symbol is an arithmetic numeral, and the second decorative symbol is a Chinese numeral). In addition, as illustrated in the same figure, in a situation where the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main area by a pattern and a number, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. After 20 seconds have elapsed, the display of the first decorative symbol in the main area is configured to be a display of only the symbol. The display of only this pattern is referred to as a standby state. The main area and the sub area may be provided in the same liquid crystal (for example, in the display area SG10 of the effect display device SG) or in different devices. In addition, as a specific example provided in a separate device, for example, a presentation display apparatus A and a presentation display apparatus B are provided as a presentation display apparatus, the presentation display apparatus A has a main area, and the presentation display apparatus B is It may have a sub area, and in such a configuration, the size of the display area of the effect display device B may be smaller than the size of the display area of the effect display device A. Good. In addition, the number of effect display devices and the number of display areas (main area, sub area, etc.) of the decorative symbol may be three or more (eg, the first area, the second area, the third area, etc.).

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in step 2064, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 resets and stops the standby preparation measurement timer SM28t. Next, in step 2066, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the standby preparation flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2100). . Also in the case of No in step 2054 or step 2060, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2100).

  Next, FIG. 98 is an illustration of a decorative symbol display form in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol displayed in the main area is displayed as a pattern and a number, and the decorative symbol displayed in the sub area is displayed as a number only, and the first decoration is displayed. The display of the numbers in the symbol is an arithmetic numeral, and the display of the numbers in the second decorative symbol is a Chinese numeral. Moreover, the number of types of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is four each. In addition, although the details will be described later, the display mode of the decorative symbol when there is a trigger hold that is a hold relating to the execution presence or absence of the pre-reading effect is the first sub-area symbol table or the second sub-area symbol table , And the display mode of the first decorative symbol and the display mode of the second decorative symbol in the sub-region, and the display mode of the first decorative symbol when there is a trigger hold. And the display mode of the second decorative symbol is the same.

  Next, FIG. 99 shows pending information management processing according to the subroutine of step 2100 of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2130 (fifth) to step 2138 (fifth) and step 3050 (fifth), that is, step 2128 (second), the drawing reservation information display control means After the SM 22 deletes the hold information and shifts the remaining hold information, in step 2130 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 holds the currently digested hold at the hold pertaining to the first main game side. Determine if there is. If Yes in step 2130 (fifth), in step 2134 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 passes the main route (the hold display variably displayed in the main area in the hold passage route passes A command to execute a hold digest display (an effect that makes it possible for the player to recognize that the hold has been digested), which is an area and will be described in detail later, is set, and the process shifts to step 2138 (fifth). On the other hand, if No in step 2130 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines in step 2132 (fifth) whether or not the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are in a standby state. Do. If Yes in step 2132 (fifth), in step 2136 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 controls the sub route (in the hold passing route, the area through which the hold display variably displayed in the sub area passes The command to execute the hold digest display passing through is described later is set, and the process moves to step 2138 (fifth). In the case of No at step 2132 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2134 (fifth). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the first main game side is the hold digest display, or the hold is digested in the standby state, and in the case, the hold digest display is executed in the main route, and the standby is performed. If the second main game player's hold is digested in a non-state condition, the hold digest display is executed on the sub route.

  Next, in step 2138 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a trigger hold in the hold. If Yes in step 2138 (fifth), in step 3050 (fifth), the drawing hold information display control means SM22 executes a hold change display control process, which will be described later, and shifts to step 2116. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2138 (fifth), the CPUSC of the sub control substrate S shifts to step 2116 without executing the process of step 3050 (fifth).

  Next, FIG. 100 is a flowchart of the hold change display control process according to the subroutine of step 3050 (fifth) of FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3052, the drawing reservation information display control means SM22 determines whether the holding arrangement is a holding arrangement which passes through the first main route after trigger holding occurs. If Yes in step 3052, in step 3054, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the trigger hold is a big hit hold. In the case of Yes in step 3054, in step 3056, the drawing hold information display control means SM 22 refers to the hold change scenario determination table for big hit time, and based on the number of hold on trigger hold occurrence, hold change scenario Until such symbol variation is started, a scenario is determined which determines how and at what timing the hold display mode related to the trigger hold changes.

  Here, a table for the big hit and a table for the lost time are illustrated as the pending change scenario determination table in the lower part of the figure. As shown in the figure, the pending change scenario relates to the number of pending trigger occurrences (the number of pending pending triggers prior to the trigger pending), the number of pending triggers, and the number of pending triggers. It will be determined by the success or failure result of the symbol variation. Also, the illustrated “1 change before” is the hold display mode immediately before the trigger hold is digested, and the big hit expectation of the “1 change before” hold display mode (when the trigger hold is a big hit It is "rainbow color-> red-> blue" from the one where the ratio of the case of becoming a big hit to the total of the case and losing case is high). In addition, although the hold display mode is configured to be able to change every symbol variation, as the trigger hold is approaching, the hold display mode does not change or changes to a display mode in which the expectation of the big hit is high. It is structured to go on. That is, it is configured so as not to change to a low-hit expected display mode as the closing of trigger hold approaches, and is configured not to lose the player's expectation for trigger hold.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in step 3058, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the suspension passing route display color determination table for big hit time, determines the display color of the suspension passing route, and executes the next process ( The process proceeds to step 2116). If No in step 3054, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 refers to the suspension change scenario determination table for lost time in step 3060 and determines the suspension change scenario based on the number of times of suspension on trigger suspension occurrence. Do. Next, in step 3062, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the hold passage route display color determination table for lost time, determines the display color of the hold passage route, and executes the next process (the process of step 2116). Move to). Also in the case of No in step 3052, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2116).

  Here, a table for the big hit and a table for the lost time are illustrated as the reserved passage route display color determination table in the lower part of the figure. As shown in the figure, the display color of the pending passage route will be determined by the result of success or failure of the symbol variation related to the trigger pending. Big hit expectation degree of hold passing route display color (ratio when it becomes big hit to the case when the trigger hold becomes big hit and when it becomes lost) is "from rainbow color → red → blue → no change" It has become. Note that although the hold transit route is configured to be determined only at the first hold digest timing after trigger hold occurrence, it is not limited to this and is configured to be able to change every time the trigger hold is digested. May be In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the display mode so as not to change to a display mode having a low jackpot expectation as the trigger suspension process approaches, as in the above-described change in the hold display mode (hold change presentation). . Moreover, about change of the display mode of the suspension display mode and the suspension passage route display color, although it is not specifically illustrated about at which timing in the symbol variation it changes, at the time of the symbol variation start, the notice effect during symbol variation The display mode may be configured to be able to change at various timings according to the execution timing, the holding occurrence time, the holding digestion time, etc. according to the effects to be executed, etc. It is possible to have an expectation that the hold display mode or the hold passing route display color changes to a display mode with a high hit probability. Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the blockage route display color which is the display color of the blockage passage route SG17 suggests the big hit expectation degree of the trigger block (when the trigger block is a big hit, the trigger blockage is lost) In this case, the reserve passing route display color is more likely to change than in the case, or the reserve passing route display color is likely to be a big hit display color with a large hit expectation. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. When it is displayed and has a display mode of the reserve digestion transfer image, and is configured to indicate the big hit expectation of the symbol variation related to the reserve digestion transfer image by the display mode, by the reserve passing route display color The display mode of the reserve digestion transfer image may be different, that is, it may be configured such that the suggested big hit expectation of the reserve digestion transfer image may be different; Change easiness of the display mode of the image may be configured to differ. In addition, depending on the retention passing route display color, it is possible to differ the effect contents of the design fluctuation which relates to the digested retention which passes the retention passing route SG17 (the ratio where the high hit expectation production ratio is executed may differ) You may

  Next, FIG. 101 is an illustration of a hold occurrence display image in the fifth embodiment. In the fifth embodiment, since the parallel lottery is configured to be executable, the situation where the first main game side hold and the second main game side hold simultaneously occur frequently However, the hold display is configured to be displayed on the common hold display section SG16 common to the hold on the first main game side and the hold on the second main game side. Also, in the order of the numbers “1 → 2 → 3 ... → 8” shown in the figure, whether the generated hold is a hold on the first main game or a hold on the second main game No, it is configured to be displayed in the order in which the suspension occurred in the common suspension display section SG16 (The suspension which has occurred most recently is displayed in the first area, and the suspension display already displayed is “1 → 2 It will be shifted and displayed like "). The hold display mode is also the same display mode as the hold display on the first main game side and the hold display on the second main game side, and the first main game can be viewed only by viewing the common hold display section SG16. It is configured such that it can not be determined whether it is the hold display on the side or the hold display on the second main game side.

  Next, FIG. 102 is a holding digestion display image figure in a 5th embodiment. First, in the upper part of the figure, an example of display on the common hold display unit SG16 when the number of holds is 4 is illustrated. As shown in the figure, two reservations for the first main game side and two reservations for the second main game side are displayed, and the first is the first main game side reservation “A1”, The second main game side 'B1' is displayed on the second main game side, the second main game side 'A2' is displayed on the third main game side, and the second main game side 'B2' is displayed on the fourth It is done. Under such circumstances, the suspension display will be described in detail when the suspension is digested.

  The middle part of the figure is an example of the order of the symbol variation related to the four reservations described above, and the lower part of the figure is an example of how the suspension display is erased in the common suspension display section SG16. The manner in which the symbol display in the fifth embodiment is executed and the hold display is erased will be described in detail with reference to these. First, by the start of execution of the symbol variation related to A1 which is the first main game side suspension, the suspension display of the first area which is the suspension display according to A1 is erased and the remaining suspension is shifted and displayed Ru. The display on the common hold display unit SG16 is "No. 1: B1, 2: A2, 3: B2." Although not shown, it is assumed that the symbol variation on the second main game side is being executed at the symbol variation start timing according to A1. Ten seconds after that, execution of symbol variation related to B1, which is a hold on the second main game side, is started. The display on the common hold display unit SG16 is "No. 1: A2, No. 2: B2". After that, 20 seconds after the start of the symbol variation related to A1, the symbol variation related to B1 ends. The symbol variation related to A1 is in the process of variation. With the end of the symbol variation related to B1, the suspension related to B2 will be digested and the symbol variation will be started, but in the display on the common suspension display part SG16, the suspension display related to "A2" will be displayed The hold display of the first area is erased. That is, from the appearance that the first and second areas in the common hold display section SG16 are on, the display in the first area is extinguished, and then the display in the second area is the first area. Will be displayed on the On the other hand, since the actually saved hold is a hold relating to "B2," the display in the first area is a hold display relating to "A2." As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the hold display displayed in the first area regardless of whether the hold actually consumed is the first main game side or the second main game side. It will be erased (turned off).

  Next, FIG. 103 is an image diagram of a reserved passage route in the fifth embodiment. First, in the fifth embodiment, the reserved passage route SG17 is displayed in the upper right part of the display area SG10. The pending passage route has a main route which is an area through which the pending display variably displayed in the main area passes, and a sub route which is an area through which the pending display variably displayed in the sub area passes. First, the left part of the same figure is an example of the case where the reserve digest display when the reserve is digested passes through the main route. In the non-standby state, the hold on the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the first area) and the hold on the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the second area) A case will be described in which “A1”, which is the hold on the first main game side, is digested first. First, by "A1" being digested, the hold indication of the first area is erased, and the hold indication is moved toward the hold passage route SG17. Thereafter, the symbol variation on the first main game side related to the suspension of “A1” is executed in the main area, so that the reserve digest display according to “A1” passes through the main route toward the main area and Become. Next, the right part of the same figure is an example of the case where the reserve digest indication when the reserve is digested passes through the sub route. In the non-standby state, the hold on the first main game side is "A1" (displayed in the first area) and the hold on the second main game side is "B1" (displayed in the second area) The case where "B1" which is a hold of the second main game side is digested first will be described. First, the “B1” is digested, the hold display of the first area is erased, and the hold consumption display moves toward the hold passage route SG17. After that, since the symbol variation on the second main game side related to the suspension of "B1" is executed in the sub-region, the suspension digest display according to "B1" will pass through the sub route toward the sub-region . As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the sub route whose main passage is the region through which the pending digest display in the pending passage route SG 17 passes is performed depending on whether symbol variation is executed in the main region or in the sub region. Is configured to be determined.

  Next, FIG. 104 is a flow chart of first main game winning combination prefetching determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2550 (second) of FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is that step 2552 and step 2578 are deleted, that is, in the fifth embodiment, even when there is a second main game side hold, the first main game It is comprised so that the pre-reading effect which concerns on the side pending | holding can be performed. In the present embodiment, the first main gaming side pre-reading effect is configured to be executed only in the non-time shortening gaming state, but it is not limited to this, the pre-reading effect is executed even in the time shortening gaming state It may be configured to be possible. In addition, it is configured to be able to execute the first main game side look-up lottery only at the time of winning, that is, at the time of holding occurrence, but is not limited to this, the change start timing of the main game symbol, the change of the main game symbol It may be configured to be able to execute the pre-reading lottery also at an intermediate timing or the like.

  Next, FIG. 105 is a flow chart of second main game winning combination prefetching determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2600 (second) of FIG. 99 in the fifth embodiment. The difference with the second embodiment is step 2602 (fifth), step 2610 (fifth) and step 2616 (fifth), that is, step 2602 (fifth), pending prefetching effect executability judging means The SM 26 k refers to the main information temporary storage means SM 11 b and determines whether or not it is currently in the time shortening gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 2602 (fifth), the process proceeds to step 2604, and in the case of No in step 2602 (fifth), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2118).

  In addition, when it is determined in step 2608 that the reserve pre-reading effect executability determination means SM 26 determines that the new reserve is a big hit on hold, the pre-order effect executability determination means SM 26 k has a predetermined probability in step 2610 (fifth) (In this example, the winning pre-selection lottery to be won in 1/3 is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. If it is determined in step 2612 that the reserve prefetching effect executability determination means SM26 determines that the new suspension is pending for the group C, then in step 2616 (fifth), the reserve prefetching effect executability determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (In the present example, the winning pre-selection lottery to be won in 1/10) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2620. As described above, in the fifth embodiment, even when the hold on the first main game side is present, the prefetching effect relating to the hold on the second main game side can be executed. In the present embodiment, the second main game side prefetching effect is configured to be executed only in the non-time shortening gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetching effect is executed even in the time shortening gaming state It may be configured to be possible. In addition, it is configured to be able to execute the second main game side look-ahead lottery only at the time of winning, that is, at the time of holding occurrence, but is not limited to this, the change start timing of the main game symbol, the change of the main game symbol It may be configured to be able to execute the pre-reading lottery also at an intermediate timing or the like. Further, in step 2610 (fifth) and step 2616 (fifth), the same win rate as the first lottery main game winning rate is selected.

  Next, FIG. 106 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2249-1, the figure display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2249-1, in step 2249-2, the figure display content determination means SM21 n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the figure display related information temporary storage means SM21 b. Next, in step 2249-3, the figure display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not trigger hold exists in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2249-3, in step 2249-5, the figure display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a hold pertaining to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2249-5, in step 2249-6, the architectural display content determination means SM21 n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the main area. Next, in step 2249-7, the drawing display content determination means SM21 n refers to the first main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main gaming symbol, 1 Determine the stop symbol and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. Next, in step 2249-8, the symbol display content determination means SM21n is in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, the first symbol content determination flag (the symbol change on the first main game side) The flag (turned on when the content is determined) is turned on, and the process shifts to step 3350 (fifth).

  In the case of No at step 2249-5, the figure display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the symbol variation related to the newly digested reservation is symbol variation from the standby state at step 2249-10. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2249-10, in step 2249-11, the architectural display content determination means SM21 n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the main area. Next, in step 2249-12, the drawing display content determination means SM 21 n refers to the second main area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information on the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main gaming symbol, 2 Determine the stop symbol and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol, and shift to step 2249-15. As described above, when the decorative symbol newly starts to change from the standby state, it is variably displayed in the main area regardless of whether the decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol. It is configured as follows. When the decorative symbol newly started to change from the standby state is the second decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol starts to change during the change of the second decorative symbol, the first decorative symbol changes. The second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main area until before, but when the variation of the first decorative symbol starts, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main area, and the second decorative symbol is sub-region Even if the first decorative symbol starts changing, the second decorative symbol is continuously changed and displayed in the main area, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area. It may be configured to change display. As described above, since the decorative symbol newly started to change from the standby state is the second decorative symbol, when the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main area, the display of the second decorative symbol is The display of the first decorative symbol and the symbol in the main area is the same, and the display of the numerals is different (the first decorative symbol is an arithmetic numeral, and the second decorative symbol is a Chinese numeral).

  Further, in the case of No at step 2249-10, at step 2249-13, the figure display content determination means SM21 n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the sub-area. Next, in step 2249-14, the drawing display content determination means SM21 n refers to the second sub area symbol table (see FIG. 98) based on the information on the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main gaming symbol, 2 Determine the stop symbol and the variation pattern of the decorative symbol. Next, in step 3100 (fifth), the device display content determination means SM21n executes main region interrupt processing A, which will be described later, and proceeds to step 2249-15. Next, in step 2249-15, the symbol display content determination means SM21n is in the flag area of the symbol display related information temporary storage means SM21b, the second symbol content determination flag (to the symbol variation on the second main game side) The flag (turned on when the content is determined) is turned on, and the process shifts to step 3350 (fifth).

  Next, in step 3350 (fifth), the device display content determination means SM21 n executes effect content determination processing described later, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2300). Further, in the case of No at step 2249-3, at step 3150 (fifth), pre-reading display control processing to be described later is executed, and processing proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2300). Also in the case of No at step 2249-1, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing of step 2300). In the fifth embodiment, when the second main gaming symbol starts to change in the standby state, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main gaming symbol is variably displayed in the main area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the situation other than when the interrupting effect is executed, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is always variably displayed in the main area (even in the standby state) The second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol may be variably displayed in the sub area.

  Next, FIG. 107 is a flowchart of effect display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 3350 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3352, the notice effect display content determination means SM 24n executes reading of the result of the lottery result of the symbol variation based on the command received from the main control board M side. Next, in step 3354, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 3354, in step 3356, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n refers to the first decorative symbol effect content determination table based on the result of the lottery result and the change pattern of the first decorative symbol, Determine the contents of such effects. Next, in step 3358, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines the first half priority and the second half priority of the symbol variation based on the determined effect content relating to the symbol variation that has been decided and temporarily stores it, and the next processing The process moves to (the process of step 2300). The first half priority and the second half priority will be described later. Further, in the case of No in step 3354, in other words, in the case where the symbol variation is symbol variation on the second main game side, in step 3360, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n is the result of the lottery result and the second decorative symbol. Based on the variation mode, the second decoration symbol effect content determination table is referred to, and the effect content relating to the symbol variation is determined. Next, in step 3362, the notice effect display content determining means SM 24 n determines the priority of the symbol change based on the determined effect based on the symbol change, temporarily stores it, and executes the next process (the process of step 2300) Move to). The priority will be described later.

  Next, FIG. 108 is an example of a first decorative symbol presentation content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the contents of the effect relating to the first decorative symbol are configured to be determined by the result of the first main gaming symbol and the change time (the change mode), and the interrupt content is determined by the determined contents of the effect. The first half priority and the second half priority, which are factors for determining the presence or absence of presentation, are determined. In the case of a big hit, the priority result is relatively higher than in the case of a loss. In addition, when the fluctuation time is long, the priority is relatively higher than when the fluctuation time is short. In addition, the first half priority is the priority related to the period before the start of SP reach production (super reach production) execution in the symbol change, and the second half priority is the priority according to the period after the start of SP reach production start In the symbol variation (content of presentation) in which the SP reach effect is not executed, the apparatus has the first half priority but does not have the second half priority. The priority is a number from "0" to "3".

  Next, FIG. 109 is an example of a second decoration symbol effect content determination table in the fifth embodiment. As shown in the figure, the effect contents relating to the second decorative symbol are configured to be determined by the success / failure result and the fluctuation time (the fluctuation mode) of the second main game symbol, and the interrupt content is determined by the determined effect contents. It is comprised so that the priority which is an element which determines the execution presence or absence of presentation will be determined. In addition, in the second decorative symbol, unlike the first decorative symbol, it does not have two priorities, that is, a first half priority and a second half priority, but only one priority. In the case of a big hit, the priority result is relatively higher than in the case of a loss. In addition, when the fluctuation time is long, the priority is relatively higher than when the fluctuation time is short. The priority is a number from "0" to "3".

  Next, FIG. 110 is a flowchart of the main region interrupt processing A according to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 3102, the notice effect display content determination means SM 24 n confirms the priority of the second decorative symbol according to the symbol variation. Next, in step 3104, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the priority of the second decorative symbol is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3104, in step 3106, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n is in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, the interrupt enable flag (the symbol variation of the determined second decorative symbol is The flag (turned on) when it is a change that can execute the interruption effect is turned on. Next, at step 3108, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the accessory YK is not stopped at the initial position. If Yes in step 3108, in step 3110, the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, in the flag area of the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b, the role initialization flag (to direct the role YK to the initial position The flag for operation is turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2249-15). Also in the case of No in step 3104 or step 3108, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2249-15). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, after it is determined that the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub region, the symbol variation of the second decorative symbol is displayed as an interrupt effect (variation is displayed in the sub region) It is configured to determine whether or not the effect of replacing the display areas of the decorative symbol and the decorative symbol variably displayed in the main region is executable. In addition, when it is determined that the second decorative symbol is interruptible, the position of the character YK is confirmed, and when the character YK is in operation, the character YK is driven to the initial position. Are configured to control. By configuring in this way, the details will be described later, but at the timing of executing the interrupting effect (the first timing of the plurality), the ratio at which the bonus product YK stops at the initial position is increased be able to.

  Next, FIG. 111 is a flowchart of the during-preread display control process according to the subroutine of step 3150 (fifth) of FIG. 106 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 3152, the drawing display content determination means SM 21 n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a hold pertaining to the first main game side. If Yes in step 3152, in step 3154 the device display content determination means SM 21 n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a trigger hold. If the result of the step 3154 is YES, in the step 3156, the dressing display content determination means SM21 n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as the first read first area, and proceeds to a step 3158. Here, in the fifth embodiment, the first decoration is being performed during the pre-reading effect execution (from the start of the first symbol variation after the trigger suspension exists to the end of the symbol variation related to the trigger suspension). The display area of the symbol and the second decorative pattern is configured to change, and the first reading is performed such that the first decorative pattern is variably displayed at the lower left portion of the display area SG10 as in the preview display effect image in the lower part One area is provided, and a second area for prefetching in which the second decorative symbol is variably displayed is provided at the lower right portion of the display area SG10, and the first area for prefetching and the second area for prefetching have a similar display area It is done. In addition, the display modes of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are configured to be displayed only with numerals, as in the case of being displayed in the sub area. As described above, when two effect display devices are provided, one of the effect display devices (for example, the effect display device having a larger display area) has two decorative symbols (first one). The decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be variably displayed (or stopped).

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in the case of No at step 3154, the figure display content determination means SM21n determines the display area of the decorative symbol to "prefetch first area → SP reach enlargement" at step 3158, and step 3158 Migrate to As described above, in the fifth embodiment, at the time of symbol variation execution related to trigger suspension during pre-reading effect execution, the variation of the decorative pattern related to trigger suspension is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display area SG10. The presentation is configured to be performed. In addition, the decorative symbol (for example, the second decorative symbol when the first decorative symbol is enlarged) of the person who is not displayed in an enlarged manner is variably displayed at a position not overlapping the display region of the enlarged decorative symbol. Just do it. Next, in step 3158, the drawing display content determination means SM21 n refers to the first sub-area symbol table based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol, and stops the first symbol pattern and Determine the variation mode. As described above, since the variation pattern of the decorative symbol during the pre-reading effect execution is determined with reference to the first sub-region symbol table or the second sub-region symbol table, the display pattern of the decorative symbol is displayed in the sub-region It is a display of only the same number as. Next, in step 3160, the drawing display content determination means SM21 n turns on the first symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21 b, and the next processing (processing of step 2300) Move to).

  If NO in step 3152, the figure display content determination means SM 21 n determines in step 3162 whether the newly digested hold is a trigger hold. If the result of step 3162 is YES, the figure display content determination means SM21 n determines the display area of the decorative symbol to be the second area of pre-reading, and proceeds to step 3168. If No in step 3162, in step 3166, the clothing display content determination unit SM21 n determines the display area of the decorative symbol as "preread second region → enlargement at SP reach", and proceeds to step 3168. In the fifth embodiment, regardless of whether the trigger hold is a hold relating to the first decorative symbol or a second decorative symbol, the symbol display is enlarged and displayed at the time of executing the symbol variation relating to the trigger hold. It is configured as follows. Next, in step 3168, the drawing display content determination means SM21 n refers to the second sub-area symbol table based on the information regarding the second symbol pattern and the variation pattern of the second main gaming symbol, and stops the second symbol pattern and Determine the variation mode. Next, in step 3170, the drawing display content determination unit SM21 n turns on the second symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage unit SM21 b, and the next processing (processing of step 2300) Move to).

  Next, FIG. 112 is a flowchart of a first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is step 2344 (fifth) and step 2346 (fifth), that is, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variation display command of the first decorative symbol in step 2316 After the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop) of the first decorative symbol in step 2324, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the image display command according to the timing in step 2328, Alternatively, if it is determined in step 2326 that the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has not reached the display timing of the notice image or the reach image, then in step 2344 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 selects the main control board M. It is determined whether or not the first forced stop execution command from the side has been received. If Yes in step 2344 (fifth), then the process shifts to step 2336. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2344 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 at step 2346 (fifth) indicates the area where the variable display is being performed (the main area or the sub area ) To set a stop display command (decision display) to stop the first decorative symbol with a forced loss symbol, and the process moves to step 2340. The display mode of the forced loss symbol of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, FIG. 113 is a flowchart of a second decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2350 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 2366, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether the second symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2366, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21b in step 2368. Next, in step 2370, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the second symbol variation in progress flag within the flag area of the clothing display relevant information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2372, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the second modeling change time management timer SM21t-2 and shifts to step 2374. Also in the case of No at step 2366, the process proceeds to step 2374.

  Next, in step 2374, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether the second symbol in-motion flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2374, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the second dressing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2 in step 2376. Next, in step 2378, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes the second decoration based on the second appearance change time management timer SM21t-2 and the change mode temporarily stored in the appearance display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation start timing of the symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2378, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the variation display command of the second decorative symbol in step 2379 (sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) And go to step 3200 (fifth).

  On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2378, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 at step 2380 changes the second dressing fluctuation time management timer SM21t-2 and the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the clothing display related information temporary storage means SM21b It is determined whether or not the stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) of the second decorative symbol has been reached based on. In the case of Yes in step 2380, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop display command) of the second decorative symbol in step 2381 (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, the sub sub control unit It is transmitted to the SS side), and the process shifts to step 3200 (fifth). On the other hand, in the case of No at step 2380, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25) at step 2382 is the first rendering variation time management timer SM21t-1 and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b. It is determined whether or not the display timing of the advance notice image or the reach image has been reached based on the change mode temporarily stored in (and the reach effect related information temporary storage means SM 25 b). In the case of Yes in step 2382, in step 2383, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25) sets an image display command related to the notice image or the reach image (display command transmission control process in step 2999) , And sent to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process shifts to step 3200 (fifth). Also in the case of No at step 2382, the processing shifts to step 3200 (fifth).

  Next, in step 3200 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes main area interrupt processing B described later. Next, in step 2384, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second forced stop execution command from the main control board M side has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2384, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed in step 2385 with reference to the costume display related information temporary storage means SM21b (for example, It is determined whether or not information indicating that the second main game symbol is stopped and displayed is received from the main control board M side with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11 b). In the case of Yes in step 2385, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (decision display command) of the second decorative symbol in step 2386 (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999 the sub sub control unit SS side Sent to). Next, in step 3250 (fifth), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 executes main region interrupt processing C described later, and proceeds to step 2390.

  In the case of No at step 2384, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 at step 2388 displays the second decorative symbol in the area (the pre-reading effect is not being executed, the main area or the sub area) which is variably displayed. A stop display command (decision display) for stopping with a forced loss symbol is set, and the process shifts to step 2390. The display mode of the forced loss symbol of the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol will be described in detail with reference to FIG. Next, in step 2390, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the second appearance variation time management timer SM21t-2. Next, in step 2392, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the second symbol variation flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the next processing (processing of step 2400) Migrate to Also in the case of No in step 2374 or step 2385, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 114 is a big hit time stop symbol display image view in the fifth embodiment. First, the case where the first decorative symbol displayed in the main area shown in the upper part of the figure is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol will be described. First, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variably displayed in the sub area. After that, since the first main gaming symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit is stopped and displayed in the main area ("777" in the figure). Moreover, since the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the forced loss symbol. In addition, the forced lost symbol of the second decorative symbol is "giraffe" and is a symbol which is displayed only when the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped. In addition, when the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a forced loss symbol, the background effect in the sub area is a special background effect (a background effect executed only when the forced loss symbol is stopped and displayed).

  Next, the case where the second decorative symbol displayed in the sub area shown in the lower part of the figure is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol will be described. First, the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variably displayed in the sub area, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is variably displayed in the main area. Thereafter, since the second main gaming symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, the second decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed in the sub region in a stopped state ("777" in the figure). In addition, since the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the forced loss symbol. In addition, the forced lost symbol of the first decorative symbol is "zoo" and is a symbol which is displayed only when the first main game symbol is forcibly stopped. In addition, when the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a forced loss symbol, the background effect in the main area is a special background effect (a background effect executed only when the forced loss symbol is stopped and displayed). As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the second main symbol is displayed when the first main game symbol is stopped by the big hit symbol and the second main game symbol is forcibly stopped due to a loss. Forced loss symbol of the first main game symbol by stopping with the big hit symbol and the forced loss symbol of the first decorative symbol that will be displayed when the first main game symbol is forced to stop due to a loss Are configured to differ in display mode. As shown in the drawing, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area are different in display mode. As a specific example of the display mode of the special background effect, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area may be "blue", and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may be "red". In addition, the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the display mode of the special background effect in the sub area may all be the same display mode, or the display mode of the special background effect in the main area and the special background effect in the sub area The display mode may be the same as the display mode (only the color is the same, and the pattern is different, etc.).

  Next, FIG. 115 is a flowchart of the main region interrupt processing B according to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth) of FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3202, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the second decorative symbol has been reached. In this example, the first interrupt timing is a timing 5 seconds after the start of the variation of the second decorative symbol, and it is configured to determine whether the interrupt effect can be executed at the first interrupt timing. There is. If the result of step 3202 is YES, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 is turned on in step 3204, when the changeable flag of the second decorative symbol can be interrupted in the main region interrupt process A described above. It is determined whether or not the flag) is on. In the case of Yes in step 3204, the decorative symbol display control means SM 21 determines in step 3206 whether or not the fluctuation state of the first decorative symbol in movement is in the first half. In this example, in the variation of the first decorative symbol, the portion before SP reach start is in the first half, and the SP reach start is in the second half, and in the variation where SP reach is not performed, only the first half is included. It is not supposed to be.

  In the case of Yes in step 3206, in step 3208, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 controls the first half priority of the first decorative symbol in the main area and the priority of the second decorative symbol in the sub area. Are compared, and the process proceeds to step 3212. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3206, at step 3210, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 gives priority to the second half of the first decorative symbol in change in the main area and the second priority in change in the sub area. The degree is compared, and the process proceeds to step 3212. Next, at step 3212, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether the priority of the second decorative symbol is larger than the priority of the first decorative symbol. The priority of the first decorative symbol is the priority compared in step 3208 or step 3210. In the case of Yes in step 3212, in step 3214, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In the case of Yes in step 3214, in step 3216, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 performs the effect mode of the interrupt effect in the effect mode when the feature is inoperative (with the feature YK stopped at the initial position, It determines to the production | presentation aspect of the interruption production in the case of execution start, sets the command which performs the said determined interruption production, and transfers to step 3220. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3214, in step 3218, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 displays the mode of production of the interruption production as the production mode at the time of At this time, it is decided to be an effect mode of the interrupting effect when the execution is started, and a command for executing the determined interrupting effect is set, and the process shifts to step 3220. As described above, when the priority of the second decorative symbol is larger than the first half priority or the second half priority of the first decorative symbol, the interrupt effect can be performed, but the bonus YK is at the initial position. The effect mode of the interrupting effect is configured to be different depending on whether or not it is stopped. In the fifth embodiment, the player is conspicuous because the effect is executed when the interruption effect is high when the symbol variation expectation of the symbol variation is high (the priority of the second decorative symbol is high). It is preferable to execute in a flashy) presentation mode. Therefore, it is more preferable to execute both the effect display on the liquid crystal (on the display area SG10) and the operation of the accessory than only the effect display on the liquid crystal (on the display area SG10). In other words, it is preferable to execute the interruption effect in a state where the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. Therefore, as described above, by configuring the accessory YK to operate at the initial position when the accessory YK is activated at the time of execution of the main area interrupt processing A, an effect when the interruption effect is executed As an aspect, it can be configured such that the rate at which the effect mode at the time of non-operation of the accessory is selected is increased. Note that the interrupting effect (the interrupting effect performed at the first interrupt timing) in steps 3216 and 3218 may be referred to as a first interrupting effect.

  Next, in step 3220, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the display replacement of the decorative symbol in the main area and the sub region, and shifts to step 3222. Even when the result of step 3202, step 3204 or step 3212 is No, the processing shifts to step 3222. Here, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main area, and the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub region, and the second decorative symbol (second main game symbol) is When the display area of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is not changed in the case of a big hit, the second decorative symbol variably displayed in the sub-region smaller than the main region is the big hit symbol Stop and the player's jackpot pleasure is reduced. Therefore, by performing the interruption effect and making the variable display of the second decorative symbol which is a big hit as the main area, the big hit symbol can be stopped and displayed in the main area, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. .

Next, in step 3222, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol is being displayed in the sub area. In the case of Yes in step 3222, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines in step 3224 whether or not the second interrupt timing of the second decorative symbol has been reached. Here, in the fifth embodiment, the second interrupt timing of the second decorative symbol is a timing five seconds before the end of the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3224, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines in step 3226 whether or not the second decorative symbol in change is a symbol change that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3226, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines in step 3228 whether the priority of the second decorative symbol is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (2 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3228, in step 3230, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the feature YK is in operation as an effect during variation of the first decorative symbol. In the case of Yes in step 3230, in step 3232, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the second interruption effect. Next, in step 3234, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the display replacement of the decorative symbol in the main area and the sub region, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2384). Also in the case of No in step 3222, step 3224, step 3226, step 3228 or step 3230, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2384). Thus, in the fifth embodiment, even when it is not determined that the priority of the second decorative symbol is higher than the priority of the first decorative symbol at the first interrupt timing, the second interrupt timing When the following conditions are satisfied, the interruption effect is executed as the second interruption effect.
(1) The second decorative pattern is changing in the sub area,
(2) Variation of the second decorative pattern is a big hit variation,
(3) The priority of the second decorative symbol during variation is a predetermined value (2 or more in this example),
(4) The feature YK has not been activated as an effect during the change of the first decorative symbol,
When the above conditions are satisfied, the interruption effect will be performed.

  Although not shown, since the second interruption effect is configured to be executed when the accessory YK is not activated, it is preferable to set the effect aspect in which the accessory YK is activated as an effect mode. It is. In addition, the effect mode of the second interruption effect may be an effect mode in which the player can determine that the variation of the second decorative symbol is a big hit when the character YK is activated. In the fifth embodiment, when the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main area and the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub area, the interrupt effect is performed, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. The decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub area, and the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main area, but when the interrupt effect is finished, that is, the symbol of the second main game side related to the interrupt effect When the fluctuation is a loss, the timing when the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol according to the interruption effect ends, when the symbol fluctuation of the second main game side according to the interruption effect is a big hit, the timing of the big hit end , And the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main region, and the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub region. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 117, but the third interrupt timing illustrated in FIG. 115 (FIG. 115) may be symbol fluctuation end timing = symbol fluctuation stop timing, or the symbol fluctuation is tentative. The timing immediately before the stop or the timing immediately before the decision stop of the symbol variation may be used. Furthermore, the symbol may be changed as long as it is the last timing of the interrupt timing that is present in a plurality of times in one symbol change period. In addition, when the interruption effect is executed, or when the display area of the first decorative symbol and the display area of the second decorative symbol are interchanged, for example, the interruption effect is displayed when the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the main area. When executed, the first decorative symbol in the variable display is displayed in the sub region, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main region, the variable display of the second decorative symbol displayed in the main region is The display area of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is configured not to be replaced until the end (during the fluctuation of the second decorative symbol for which the interruption effect has been performed, the next change of the first decorative symbol is started) Also in the case where it is done, it is preferable to keep the second decorative symbol variably displayed in the main area.

  Next, FIG. 116 is an interrupt production execution image diagram in the fifth embodiment. First, in the upper part of FIG. First, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variably displayed in the sub area. After that, 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of variation of the second decorative symbol, and at the time of the first interrupt timing, the bonus YK is activated as an effect corresponding to the variation of the first decorative symbol. In this case, the interruption effect is to be executed, but since the role item YK can not be operated as the interruption effect, the effect mode of “only liquid crystal display” (effect mode in which the function item YK does not operate) Therefore, the interruption effect is to be executed. In the figure, it is illustrated that the character YK operating as the effect according to the first decorative symbol returns to the initial position.

  Next, in the lower part of the figure, the presentation aspect at the time of non-operation of the bonus is illustrated. First, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is variably displayed in the sub area, the second decorative symbol Five seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, and at the time when the first interrupt timing is reached, the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position. In this case, since it is possible to operate the accessory YK as an interruption effect, the interruption effect is executed in the effect mode of the “liquid crystal display + the function operation” (effect mode in which the character YK is activated). It will be. In the same figure, it is illustrated that the feature YK is operating at the central portion of the effect display device SG as an interrupting effect relating to the second decorative symbol.

  Next, FIG. 117 is a flowchart of the main region interrupt process C according to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) of FIG. 113 in the fifth embodiment. First, at step 3252, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the second decorative symbol in change is a symbol change that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3252, the decorative symbol display control means SM 21 determines in step 3254 whether the priority of the second decorative symbol is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (3 in this example). In the case of Yes in step 3254, in step 3256, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the third interrupt effect as the interrupt effect. Next, in step 3258, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the display replacement of the decorative symbol in the main area and the sub region, and shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2390). Also in the case of No in step 3252 or step 3254, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2390). As described above, even when the interrupting effect (the second interrupting effect) can not be executed at the second interrupt timing, (1) the variation in the symbol pattern of the executed second decoration symbol becomes a big hit, (2) execution If the priority of the selected second decorative symbol satisfies both of the two conditions of the predetermined value (3 or more in this example), the third interrupt effect is produced as an interrupt effect at the stop timing of the second decorative symbol. Is configured to run. The stop timing of the second decorative symbol is referred to as the third interrupt timing. In addition, as the third interruption production effect mode, execution of the third interruption production = big hit start, so a production mode to bless the player who has decided the big hit, the same production as the big hit start It may be configured to execute. Moreover, it is good also as a production | presentation aspect in which the character YK operate | moves. Further, the effect mode of the third interruption effect may be configured to differ depending on whether the accessory YK is operating or not operating as the effect contents relating to the change of the first decorative symbol.

  Next, FIG. 118 is a flowchart of background effect control processing according to the subroutine of step 2500 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 2522, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the pre-reading in-progress flag (flag turned on when pre-reading effect is executed) is off. Determine if there is. In the case of Yes in step 2522, in step 2524, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not trigger hold exists in the hold. In the case of Yes in step 2524, in step 2526, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the variation start timing of the decorative symbol in the first main area after the trigger suspension occurrence has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2626, the background effect display control means SM23 calculates the time until the end of the symbol variation relating to trigger suspension in step 2528, and based on the result of the trigger suspension's success or failure, until the calculated time elapses Decide on a preview scenario during previewing of. Here, the lower part of FIG. In the figure, the preview advance presentation scenario is determined during the pre-reading and the appearance of the pre-reading presentation being executed is illustrated. First, at the first variation start timing of the decorative symbol after trigger hold occurrence (the variation start timing of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol with the earlier variation start of the first decorative symbol), the symbol variation end related to the trigger suspension The time up to is calculated, and the previewing preview scenario during the pre-reading in the relevant period is determined. After that, when 20 seconds have elapsed from the first symbol variation start timing, the display of "Tsu" is executed as a serif notice. Thereafter, when 40 seconds have elapsed from the first symbol variation start timing, cut-in effect is executed. Thereafter, when 60 seconds have elapsed from the first symbol variation start timing, an effect that the accessory YK is activated is executed. Thereafter, when 70 seconds have elapsed from the first symbol variation start timing, the symbol variation relating to the trigger suspension is ended. In the fifth embodiment, since the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed at the same time, when the advance notice effect is executed based on the change time of one pattern change, the notice effect relating to any pattern change May be recognized, that is, there is a risk that it will be recognized which symbol variation is the symbol variation related to trigger suspension, and the interest of symbol variation related to suspension other than trigger suspension becomes low I will. Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, by managing the execution timing of the advance presentation effect based on the elapsed time from the start of the change of the first decorative symbol after trigger suspension occurrence, the enjoyment of the entire pre-reading effect will be enhanced.

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, in step 2530, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on a pre-reading flag in the flag area of the background effect relevant information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2532, the background effect display control unit SM23 sets "pre-reading background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {the process of step 3300 (fifth)}. As described above, "pre-reading in background" is configured to be initially set in the case of Yes in step 2526, that is, at the start timing of variation of the decorative symbol in the first main area after trigger hold occurs. In other words, the timing at which the "normal background" is switched to the "pre-reading background" is the start timing of the symbol variation. Further, when the background effect is “pre-reading background”, as described above with reference to FIG. 111, the pre-reading first area in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed is provided at the lower left portion of the display area SG10. In the lower right portion of the display area SG10, a prefetch second area in which the second decorative symbol is variably displayed is provided, and the first prefetch area and the second prefetch area are variably displayed side by side in the same display area It will be. In the case of No at step 2522, the background effect display control means SM23 determines at step 2534 whether or not symbol variation relating to trigger suspension has ended. If Yes in step 2534, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the prefetch flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b in step 2536, and proceeds to step 2538. Also in the case of No in step 2524 or step 2526, the processing shifts to step 2538. Next, in step 2538, the background effect display control unit SM23 sets "normal background" as the background effect, and proceeds to the next process {the process of step 3300 (fifth)}. If NO in step 2534, the background effect display control unit SM23 sets "pre-reading background" as a background effect in step 2540, and shifts to the next processing {processing of step 3300 (fifth)}. The "pre-reading background" and the "normal background" may be displayed in any display mode as long as the player visually recognizes them.

  Next, FIG. 119 is a flowchart of the bonus game drive control process according to the subroutine of step 3300 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3302, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the effect content relating to symbol variation is newly determined. Note that, in step 3302, it is determined whether or not the effect contents other than during the pre-reading effect execution are determined. In the case of Yes in step 3302, in step 3304, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is an operation schedule of the bonus item YK in the newly determined effect contents. In the case of Yes in step 3304, in step 3306, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the article YK based on the variation mode and the effect content of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation, and shifts to step 3314. If NO in step 3302, the background effect display control unit SM23 determines in step 3308 whether or not a pre-reading preview effect scenario is newly determined. In step 3308, it is determined whether or not the effect contents in the case where the pre-reading effect is being executed have been determined. In the case of Yes in step 3308, in step 3310, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not there is an operation schedule of the bonus item YK in the newly determined effect contents. In the case of Yes in step 3310, in step 3312, the background effect display control means SM23 activates the feature YK on the basis of the previewing advance effect scenario and shifts to step 3314. Even when the result of step 3304, step 3308 or step 3310 is No, the process moves to step 3314.

  Next, in step 3314, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the character initialization flag (the change of the second decorative symbol is a change that can be interrupted It is determined whether the flag (for operating the accessory YK at the initial position), which is turned on when the accessory YK is not stopped at the initial position at the determined time, is on. In the case of Yes in step 3314, in step 3316, the background effect display control means SM23 operates the accessory TK toward the initial position. Next, in step 3318, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the feature initialization flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 3320. Also in the case of No in step 3314, the process shifts to step 3320. Thus, in the fifth embodiment, at the time when it is determined that the symbol variation of the second decorative symbol is an interruptible variation, if the accessory YK has been actuated from the initial position, it is activated. It is configured to execute control to return the accessory YK to the initial position. Next, in step 3320, the background effect display control unit SM23 determines whether it is the execution timing of the current interrupt effect. In the case of Yes in step 3320, in step 3322 the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the interrupting effect to be executed is an interrupting effect of the effect mode in which the accessory YK operates. In addition, as an interruption production in which the character YK operates, for example, an interruption effect (a first interruption effect), which is an effect mode at the time of non-operation of a character, is executed at a first interruption timing. The third interruption effect is executed, and so on. In the case of Yes in step 3322, in step 3324, the background effect display control means SM 23 activates the bonus item YK based on the effect mode of the interrupting effect, and shifts to the next process (the process of step 2999). Also in the case of No in step 3320 or step 3322, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2999).

  By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment, two decoration symbols of the first decoration symbol and the second decoration symbol are displayed on the effect display device in parallel. The first main game side is configured by configuring the lottery so as to be executable, setting the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game side as the first decorative symbol, and setting the decorative pattern corresponding to the second main game side as the second decorative symbol. It can be configured to simultaneously display the symbol variation of the second main game and the symbol variation of the second main game side. In addition, the first decorative symbol is mainly displayed in the main area, and the second decorative symbol is mainly displayed in the sub area having a smaller display area than the main area, and is displayed in the sub area. When the big hit expectation of the pattern fluctuation which relates to the case is high, the interruption production is executed and the constitution of the display of the 2nd decoration design is indicated in the main territory, the fluctuation indication of the decoration design which it wants to show to the player The game can be displayed in a large size in the main area, which will enhance the interest of the game.

(Modification 1 from the fifth embodiment)
Here, in the fifth embodiment, the first decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game symbol is displayed in the main area, and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game symbol is displayed in the sub area, the second In the case where the priority of the decorative symbol is high (for example, the big hit expectation is high), the interruption effect is executed to display the second decorative symbol in the main area, but the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed. The display mode is not limited to this. Therefore, such a configuration is set as a first modification of the fifth embodiment, and only the changes from the fifth embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 120 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2200 (fifth) of FIG. 96 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The change from the fifth embodiment is from step 2249-16 (fifth variation 1) to step 2249-26 (fifth variation 1), that is, at step 2249-3, the graphic display content determination means SM21n is suspended. When it is determined that there is no trigger suspension within, at step 2249-16 (fifth modification 1), the figure display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the symbol variation is a symbol variation from the standby state. . In the case of Yes in step 2249-16 (fifth modification 1), in step 2249-17 (fifth modification 1), the clothing display content determination means SM21 n determines the display region of the decorative symbol as the main region. Next, in step 2249-18 (fifth modification 1), the figure display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the newly digested hold is a hold pertaining to the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2249-18 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-19 (fifth change 1), the figure display content determination means SM21 n uses the information on the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main game symbol. Based on the first main area symbol table, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to step 2249-8. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2249-18 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-20 (fifth change 1), the symbol display content determination means SM21 n relates to the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main game symbol. Based on the information, the second main area symbol table is referred to, the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second decorative symbol are determined, and the process proceeds to step 2249-8.

  If No in step 2249-16 (fifth change 1), in the step 2249-21 (fifth change 1), the drawing display content determination means SM21 n determines that the newly digested hold is on the first main game side It is determined whether or not it is a hold related to. In the case of Yes in step 2249-21 (fifth change 1), in step 2249-22 (fifth change 1), the figure display content determination means SM21 n displays the display area of the decoration pattern as the pattern of the previous first decoration pattern. Determine the same display area as fluctuation. Next, in step 2249-23 (fifth modification 1), the mounting display content determination means SM21 n is based on the information on the stop symbol and the variation mode of the first main gaming symbol, the first main area symbol table or the first sub The stop symbol and the variation mode of the first decorative symbol are determined with reference to the region symbol table, and the process proceeds to step 2249-26 (fifth modification 1). In the case of No at step 2249-21 (fifth modification 1), at step 2249-24 (fifth modification 1), the graphic display content determination means SM21 n displays the display area of the decorative symbol at the previous second decorative symbol Determine the same display area as the symbol variation. Next, in step 2249-25 (fifth modification 1), the mounting display content determination means SM21 n is the second main area symbol table or the second sub based on the information regarding the stop symbol and the variation mode of the second main gaming symbol. The stop symbol and the variation mode of the second decorative symbol are determined with reference to the region symbol table, and the process proceeds to step 2249-26 (fifth modification 1). Next, in step 2249-26 (fifth modification 1), the figure display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the display area of the decorative symbol related to the symbol variation is a sub-region. In the case of Yes in step 2249-26 (fifth modification 1), the process proceeds to step 3100 (fifth), and in the case of No, the process proceeds to step 2249-15. As described above, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the decorative symbol starts to change when not in the standby state, the previous symbol is applied to both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. It is comprised so that it may be fluctuate | varied in the area | region (either the main area | region and the sub area | region) which was fluctuate | variated and displayed by the fluctuation | variation. Also, in the standby state, when the decorative symbol starts to change, regardless of whether the decorative symbol newly starting to change is the first decorative symbol or the second decorative symbol, it is newly started from the standby state The decorative symbol whose fluctuation has started is variably displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbol whose fluctuation is started later is variably displayed in the sub area.

  Next, FIG. 121 is an example of a second decoration symbol effect content determination table in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. In the first modified example from the fifth embodiment, it is not fixedly determined which of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is mainly displayed in the main area, so the first decorative symbol is also selected in the second decorative symbol. Similar to the decorative symbol, the first half priority and the second half priority, which are elements for determining the presence or absence of the interrupt production, are determined by the determined contents of the effect. In the case of a big hit, the priority result is relatively higher than in the case of a loss. In addition, when the fluctuation time is long, the priority is relatively higher than when the fluctuation time is short. In addition, the first half priority is the priority related to the period before the start of SP reach production (super reach production) execution in the symbol change, and the second half priority is the priority according to the period after the start of SP reach production start In the symbol variation (content of presentation) in which the SP reach effect is not executed, the apparatus has the first half priority but does not have the second half priority. The priority is a number from "0" to "3".

  Next, FIG. 122 is a flowchart of the main region interrupt processing A according to the subroutine of step 3100 (fifth) of FIG. 120 in the first modification of the fifth embodiment. The changes from the fifth embodiment are steps 3112 (fifth variation 1), 3102 (fifth variation 1), step 3104 (fifth variation 1), step 3114 (fifth variation 1) and step 3116 (fifth variation). 5), that is, in step 3112 (fifth change 1), the notice effect display content determination means SM24n determines whether or not the decorative symbol variably displayed in the sub-region is the second decorative symbol. judge. If Yes in step 3112 (fifth modification 1), in step 3102 (fifth modification 1), the notice effect display content determination means SM 24n confirms the first half priority of the second decorative symbol according to the symbol variation. Next, in step 3104 (fifth modification 1), the notice effect display content determination means SM24 n determines whether or not the first half priority of the confirmed second decorative symbol is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (2 in this example). judge. In the case of Yes in step 3104 (fifth modification 1), the process proceeds to step 3106, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2249-15). Moreover, in the case of No in step 3112 (fifth change 1), in step 3114 (fifth change 1), the notice effect display content determination means SM 24 n confirms the first half priority of the first decorative symbol according to the symbol variation. . In the case of Yes in step 3114 (fifth modification 1), in step 3116 (fifth modification 1), the notice effect display content determination means SM24 n determines that the first half priority of the first decorative symbol confirmed is a predetermined value (in this example) , 2) It is determined whether it is more than. In the case of Yes in step 3116 (fifth modification 1), the process proceeds to step 3106, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2249-15). As described above, in the first modification from the fifth embodiment, the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub region, and the second decorative symbol is variably displayed in the sub region. Since the interruption effect can be performed also in the case, it is determined whether the variation of the decorative symbol currently displayed in the sub area is a change that can execute the interruption effect. Moreover, since the timing which performs the said process is a timing (timing before pattern change start) before SP reach starts, it is comprised so that the first half priority may be confirmed as a priority.

  Next, FIG. 123 is a flowchart of a first decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 of FIG. 96 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The point of change from the fifth embodiment is step 3200 (fifth modification 1), that is, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the first decorative symbol variation display command in step 2316, the decoration in step 2324 After the symbol display control means SM21 sets the stop display command (temporary stop) of the first decorative symbol, after the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the image display command according to the timing in step 2328, or in step 2326 If it is determined that the decorative symbol display control means SM21 has not reached the display timing of the notice image or the reach image, then at step 3200 (fifth modification 1), the decorative symbol display control means SM21 processes main region interrupt processing described later. Execute B and shift to step 2344 (fifth).

  Next, FIG. 124 is a flowchart of the main region interrupt processing B according to the subroutine of step 3200 (fifth modification 1) of FIG. 123 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. First, in step 3236, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the decorative symbol in the variation is being varied in the sub region. In the first modification from the fifth embodiment, when the main area interrupt processing B in the figure is executed in the first decorative symbol display control processing, the first decorative symbol is determined, and the second When executed in the decorative symbol display control process, the second decorative symbol is determined. In the case of Yes in step 3236, in step 3237, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the first interrupt timing of the decorative symbol displayed in the sub area has been reached. In this example, the first interrupt timing is the timing 5 seconds after the start of the variation of the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol variably displayed in the sub area at the first interrupt timing can execute the interrupt effect It is comprised so that it may determine. In the case of Yes in step 3237, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines in step 3238 whether or not the interrupt enable flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 3238, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines in step 3239 whether or not the fluctuation state of the decorative symbol being changed in the main area is the first half. In this example, in the variation of the decorative symbol, the part before SP reach start is in the first half, and after SP reach start is in the second half, and in the variation where SP reach is not executed, it has only the first half And

  In the case of Yes in step 3239, in step 3240, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 compares the first half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the main region with the first half priority of the decorative symbol changing in the sub region , Step 3242-1. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 3239, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 selects the second half priority of the decorative symbol in motion in the main area and the first half priority of the decorative symbol in motion in the sub region in step 3241 It compares and it transfers to step 3242-1. Next, at step 3242-1, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the priority of the decorative symbol variably displayed in the sub region is larger than the priority of the decorative symbol varied in the main region Determine if The priority of the decorative symbol variably displayed in the main area is the priority compared in step 3240 or step 3241. If Yes in step 3242-1, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the accessory YK is stopped at the initial position in step 3422-2. In the case of Yes in step 3242-2, in step 3422-3, the decorative symbol display control means SM 21 makes the effect mode of the interrupt effect in the effect mode when the role is inoperative (the role YK is stopped at the initial position) In the state, it is decided to the effect mode of the interrupting effect when the execution is started, the command to execute the determined interrupting effect is set, and the process shifts to step 3245-5. On the other hand, in the case of No at step 3242-2, at step 3242-4, the decorative symbol display control means SM 21 performs the production mode of the interrupt production at the production mode at the time of the product operation (action product YK operates In the state where it is determined, it is determined to be the effect mode of the interrupting effect when the execution is started, the command to execute the determined interrupting effect is set, and the process proceeds to step 3245-5. In this manner, when the first half priority of the decorative symbol variably displayed in the sub area is larger than the first half priority or the second half priority of the decorative symbol variably displayed in the main area, the interrupt effect is executed. Although it is comprised so that it acquires, it is comprised so that the production | presentation aspect of interruption production may differ by whether the accessory YK has stopped at the initial position.

  Next, in step 3245-5, the decorative symbol display control means SM 21 sets a command for executing the display replacement of the decorative symbols in the main area and the sub area, and shifts to step 3242-6. Incidentally, even in the case of No in step 3237, step 3238 or step 3242-1, the processing shifts to step 3242-6.

  Next, at step 3242-6, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the variation of the decorative symbol is being displayed in the sub area. In the case of Yes in step 3242-6, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines in step 3422-7 whether or not the second interrupt timing of the decorative symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes at step 3242-7, at step 3242-8, the decorative symbol display control means SM 21 determines whether or not the decorative symbol being changed in the sub area is a symbol variation that is a big hit. If Yes in step 3242-8, in step 3242-9, the decorative symbol display control means SM 21 determines whether the second half priority of the decorative symbol being changed in the sub area is a predetermined value (2 in this example) or more Whether the second interrupt timing is later than the SP reach start timing or not is determined. If Yes in step 3242-9, in step 3243-1, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the article YK is in operation as an effect during fluctuation of the decorative symbol in the main area Do. In the case of Yes in step 3243-1, in step 3243-2, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command to execute the second interruption effect. Next, in step 3243-3, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a command for executing the display substitution of the decorative symbols in the main area and the sub area, and the process of the next process {step 5344 (fifth) Move to}. The process also proceeds to the next process {the process of step 2344 (fifth)} when No in step 3242-6, 3242-7, 3242-8, 3242-9 or 3243-1. In the first modification of the fifth embodiment, when the interruption effect is executed and the display of the decorative symbol is switched between the main area and the sub area, the decorative symbol newly displayed in the main area is displayed. The display area of the decorative symbol after that is configured to be the display area after the execution of the interruption effect, even if the design change related to is not a big hit. Specifically, when the first decorative symbol is displayed in the main area and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area, the interrupt effect is executed, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the main area. Even if the first decorative symbol is displayed in the sub-region and the result of the symbol variation of the second decorative symbol is lost as a result of execution of the interruption effect, the second symbol is displayed in the main region in the next symbol variation. A symbol is displayed, and the first decorative symbol is displayed in the sub area. The third interrupt timing illustrated in FIG. 124 (FIG. 124) may be symbol variation end timing = symbol variation stop timing, timing immediately before temporary suspension of symbol variation, timing immediately before decision suspension of symbol variation It may be Furthermore, the symbol may be changed as long as it is the last timing of the interrupt timing that is present in a plurality of times in one symbol change period.

  Next, FIG. 125 is a flowchart of the main region interrupt processing C according to the subroutine of step 3250 (fifth) of FIG. 123 in the first modification from the fifth embodiment. The change point from the fifth embodiment is step 3260 (fifth variation 1) and step 3262 (fifth variation 1), that is, in step 3260 (fifth variation 1), the notice effect display control means SM24 is It is determined whether or not the symbol variation of the decorative symbol in variation in the sub-region is a symbol variation that is a big hit. In the case of Yes in step 3260 (fifth modification 1), in step 3262 (fifth modification 1), the notice effect display control means SM24 determines that the second half priority of symbol variation of the decorative symbol in variation in the sub area (In this example, it is determined whether or not it is 3) (the third interrupt timing is the timing after the SP reach start timing, so the second half priority is determined). In the case of Yes in step 3262 (fifth modification 1), the process proceeds to step 3256, and in the case of No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2340).

  By configuring as described above, according to the gaming machine according to the first modification from the fifth embodiment, two decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the effect display device As a configuration, it is possible to execute parallel lottery, and by making the decorative symbol corresponding to the first main game side as the first decorative symbol, and setting the decorative symbol corresponding to the second main game side as the second decorative symbol, The symbol variation on the first main game side and the symbol variation on the second main game side can be displayed simultaneously. In addition, among the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the decorative symbol for which the variable display is first started in the standby state is displayed in the main area, and the decorative symbol for which the variable display is started is then displayed in the sub area By configuring to be configured, it is possible to equalize the value of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, and when displaying the first decorative symbol in the main region and the second decorative symbol in the main region By frequently replacing the display case, the player can be made to pay attention to any symbol variation of the symbol variation on the first main game side and the symbol variation on the second main game side.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configurations shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the additional configurations shown in the above embodiments are of course added to these concepts, as well as the combination and separation (superordinate conceptization) of these listed concepts. May be

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that executes a yes-no decision based on the random number and determines the stop display mode of the identification information and the variation display mode of the identification information based on the result of the yes-no decision;
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the identification information after the
After the result of the success or failure judgment is won and the identification information is stopped and displayed, a special winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can be made advantageous for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
After the symbol for the first effect is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the control for causing the symbol for the first effect to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is controlled First effect design symbol display control means (for example, decoration symbol display control means SM21);
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect design is controlled to be stopped on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) And second effect design symbol display control means (eg, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
The period from the start of fluctuation display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one effect period, and it is possible to change and display both the symbol for the first effect and the symbol for the second effect within a certain effect period,
The first effect symbol variably displayed in a certain effect period may be temporarily stopped before being definitely displayed in a certain effect period, and temporarily stopped. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute the pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one rendering period, and when the first rendering symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first rendering symbol is determined The special stop display mode that is not displayed when the stop display is displayed is configured to be temporarily stop displayed,
The second effect symbol variably displayed in a certain effect period is configured so as not to temporarily stop the special stop display mode in the certain effect period. is there.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1-2) is
The first starting port where game balls can enter
The second starting port where game balls can enter
Variable winning opening that can take open and closed states,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit;
The main game club is
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first starting opening;
First game content determination means for executing a yes / no determination based on the first random number and determining a stop display mode of the first identification information and a variation display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the yes / no determination;
First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second starting opening;
Second game content determination means for executing a yes / no determination based on the second random number and determining a stop display mode of the second identification information and a variation display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the yes / no determination;
Second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the pass / fail judgment based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the pass / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed Special game control means capable of executing a special game which can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player;
The game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit to the secondary gaming unit side is provided, and while the first identification information is variably displayed, the second identification information is variably displayed. And the first identification information is not displayed while it is displayed while the second identification information is displayed in a floating state.
The secondary gaming unit is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit side;
Effect display content control means for controlling the effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
First effect design display control means for controlling the first effect design to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit after the first effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit;
The second effect symbol display control means is configured to control the second effect symbol to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit,
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or in the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, both the symbol for the first effect and the symbol for the second effect can be changed and displayed Configured to be
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variation display mode, a variation display of a first effect design corresponding to the certain variation display mode and a second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode Both of the variable display of
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variation display mode, the variation display of the first effect design corresponding to the certain variation display mode and the second effect design corresponding to the certain variation display mode Both of the variable display of
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the stop display of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the stop display of
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the stop indication of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to execute both of the stop display of
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or within the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is within one production period,
The first effect design that is variably displayed within a certain performance period can be temporarily stopped before being definitively stopped within the certain performance period, and that temporary When it is stopped and displayed, it is possible to execute simulated fluctuation that is displayed again within the certain one rendering period, and when the symbol for the first rendering is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is for the first rendering Special stop display mode that is not displayed when the symbol is definitively stopped and displayed is configured to be temporarily stopped and displayed,
The second effect symbol variably displayed in a certain effect period is configured not to temporarily stop the special stop display mode in the certain effect period. Machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (2) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that executes a yes-no decision based on the random number and determines the stop display mode of the identification information and the variation display mode of the identification information based on the result of the yes-no decision;
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the identification information after the
After the result of the success or failure judgment is won and the identification information is stopped and displayed, a special winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can be made advantageous for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
After a plurality of types of first effect designs are variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), a first effect design that is one type or a combination of a plurality of types is displayed on the effect display units (for example, A first effect symbol display control unit (for example, a decorative symbol display control unit SM21) for controlling to stop and display on the effect display device SG);
After the second display symbol (for example, effect display device SG) is variably displayed on a plurality of types of second effect symbols, a second effect symbol that is a combination of one type or a plurality of types is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, And a second effect symbol display control means (for example, a decorative symbol display control means SM21) for controlling the stop display on the effect display device SG).
The period from the start of fluctuation display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one effect period, and after the symbol for the first effect is variably displayed within a certain effect period, the stop display is definitively displayed, and within the one effect period After the second effect design symbol is changed and displayed, it is configured to be fixedly stopped and displayed.
The first effect symbol variably displayed in a certain effect period may be temporarily stopped before being definitely displayed in a certain effect period, and temporarily stopped. When it is displayed, it is configured to be variably displayed again within a certain one rendering period, and when the symbol for the first rendering is definitively or provisionally halted, at the time of the suspension display. It is indicated that the special stop display mode which shows that there is a possibility of the execution of the special game after that while the special game is not executed may be stopped and displayed as a symbol for the first effect which is the combination of one or more kinds. Is configured and
The second effect design that is variably displayed within a certain one production period can not be temporarily displayed as a stop before it is definitively stopped and displayed within the certain one performance period, or the certain one performance Even if the stop display is tentatively displayed before the stop display is definitely decided within the period, the special stop display mode is used as a symbol for the second effect that is a combination of one or more types. Even when the second effect design is decidedly stopped and displayed without being able to be stop displayed, the special stop display mode is not displayed as the second effect design that is a combination of one or more types. It is a pachinko game machine characterized by being.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (3) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that executes a yes-no decision based on the random number and determines the stop display mode of the identification information and the variation display mode of the identification information based on the result of the yes-no decision;
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the identification information after the
After the result of the success or failure judgment is won and the identification information is stopped and displayed, a special winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can be made advantageous for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
After the symbol for the first effect is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the control for causing the symbol for the first effect to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is controlled First effect design symbol display control means (for example, decoration symbol display control means SM21);
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect design is controlled to be stopped on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) And second effect design symbol display control means (eg, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
The period from the start of fluctuation display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one effect period, and it is possible to change and display both the symbol for the first effect and the symbol for the second effect within a certain effect period,
The first effect symbol variably displayed in a certain effect period may be temporarily stopped before being definitely displayed in a certain effect period, and temporarily stopped. When it is displayed, it is possible to execute the pseudo-variation that is displayed again within the certain one rendering period, and when the first rendering symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the first rendering symbol is determined The special stop display mode that is not displayed when the stop display is displayed is configured to be temporarily stop displayed,
The second effect design that is variably displayed in a certain effect period is configured not to temporarily stop the special stop display mode in the one effect period,
As a display state of a first effect design in a certain effect period, a first display state in which the first effect design being variably displayed can be visually recognized by the player and the first effect design being variably displayed Is configured to take either of the second display state in which the symbol for the first effect is more difficult for the player to visually recognize than the first display state or the second effect in a certain effect period The design is configured to be displayed at least in the second display state,
When the special stop display mode is provisionally displayed as a symbol for the first effect within a certain effect period, the symbol can not be included when the symbol for the first effect is definitively stopped and displayed. It is configured to be a first special stop display mode in which a kind of first effect design is included, or to be a second special stop display mode in which the specific type of first effect design is not included,
When the symbol for the first effect is temporarily displayed in a stop within a certain effect period, the second special stop display mode is tentatively displayed than when the first special stop display mode is tentatively displayed. The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the expected display of the special game after the end of the one effect period is higher when the stop display is performed.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (4) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage unit (for example, the symbol holding unit MJ 32) which temporarily stores the acquired random number and controls so that the suspension occurs.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the change display of the stop display mode of the identification information and the identification information based on the result of the yes / no judgment Game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining an aspect;
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the identification information after the
After the result of the success or failure judgment is won and the identification information is stopped and displayed, a special winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can be made advantageous for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
After the fluctuation display of the effect design on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect design for controlling the effect design symbol to be stopped on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) Display control means (for example, effect display control means SM20);
The period from the start of fluctuation display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one effect period, and it is configured to be able to display fluctuation of design symbols within a certain effect period,
The symbol for effect that is variably displayed in a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped before being definitely displayed in a certain effect period, and temporarily displayed. In this case, it is possible to execute the pseudo-variation that is displayed again in a variable manner during the one production period, and when the symbol for the production is definitely or provisionally stopped, the definite or provisional stop is performed. At the time of display, it indicates that the special game is not executed, while the special stop display mode which indicates that the special game may be performed is definitely or provisionally displayed after the definite or temporary stop display. Is configured to be able to be displayed stopped on
If a predetermined condition is satisfied before a variable display start condition of identification information about a certain hold is satisfied after a certain hold occurs, the certain hold is designated as a specific hold, and when a certain hold occurs If there is one or more pre-holds that are pending to satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information prior to the given specific hold, the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-treated reserve Within the one production period corresponding to the satisfied case, the special stop display mode is definitely displayed as the production design symbol only when the production design symbol is definitely stopped and displayed, while the identification regarding the specific hold Within one effect period corresponding to the case where the variable display start condition of information is satisfied, the special as the effect pattern only when the effect design symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed It is pachinko machines, characterized in that stop display mode is configured to be displayed temporarily stopped.

A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the acquired random number up to this point and controls so that the hold occurs.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the change display of the stop display mode of the identification information and the identification information based on the result of the yes / no judgment Game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining an aspect;
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the identification information after the
After the result of the success or failure judgment is won and the identification information is stopped and displayed, a special winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can be made advantageous for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
After the fluctuation display of the effect design on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect design for controlling the effect design symbol to be stopped on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) Display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
The period from the start of fluctuation display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one effect period, and it is configured to be able to display fluctuation of design symbols within a certain effect period,
The symbol for effect that is variably displayed in a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped before being definitely displayed in a certain effect period, and temporarily displayed. In this case, it is possible to execute the pseudo-variation that is displayed again in a variable manner during the one production period, and when the symbol for the production is definitely or provisionally stopped, the definite or provisional stop is performed. At the time of display, it indicates that the special game is not executed, while the special stop display mode which indicates that the special game may be performed is definitely or provisionally displayed after the definite or temporary stop display. Is configured to be able to be displayed stopped on
When the special stop display mode is stopped and displayed as the effect symbol when the effect design symbol is determinedly or provisionally stopped and displayed within a certain effect period, at least one special effect symbol and the special effect symbol are displayed. It is configured to be a combination with multiple normal effect designs that are different from the effect design symbols,
If a predetermined condition is satisfied before a variable display start condition of identification information about a certain hold is satisfied after a certain hold occurs, the certain hold is designated as a specific hold, and when a certain hold occurs If there is one or more pre-holds that are pending to satisfy the variable display start condition of the identification information prior to the given specific hold, the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the pre-treated reserve When the special stop display mode is determinatively or provisionally displayed within a single effect period corresponding to a satisfied case, the plurality of normal effect symbols can not be of the same type, while the identification regarding the specific hold When the special stop display mode is determinatively or provisionally stopped within one rendering period corresponding to the case where the variable display start condition of information is satisfied, the plurality of normal renderings Symbol is pachinko machine, characterized by being configured so that can be the same type.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (6) is
A first start port (for example, a first main game start port A10) to which game balls can enter;
A second start port (for example, a second main game start port B10) to which game balls can enter;
It is a variable member attached to the second starting opening (for example, the second main game starting opening B10) which can be displaced to the open state and the closed state, and when displaced to the open state, the second starting opening (for example, the second opening The game ball is allowed to enter the main game start port B10) or is easy to enter compared to the closed or closed state, and when shifted to the closed state, the game ball is moved to the second start port (for example, the second main game start port B10) A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric role thing B11d) which is configured to be difficult to enter compared to the entry impossible or open state;
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g) capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit (for example, an auxiliary control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit;
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ 21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first start hole (for example, first main game start hole A10) ,
First game content determination means (for example, game content) which determines the stop display mode of the first identification information and the variation display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the success / failure determination. Decision means MN),
According to the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display portion (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g) First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
Second random number acquisition means (for example, second main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second start hole (for example, second main game start hole B10) ,
Second game content determination means (for example, game content) which executes a yes-no decision based on the second random number and determines the stop display mode of the second identification information and the variation display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the yes-no decision Decision means MN),
After the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit (for example, second main game symbol display unit B21g) according to the determination by the second game content determination unit (for example, the game content determination unit MN) (Ii) second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for performing control to stop and display the two identification information;
After the success / failure determination result based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the success / failure determination result based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is displayed and stopped , And special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game which can make a variable winning hole (for example, the first large winning hole C10 and the second large winning hole C20) advantageous for the player ,
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
After the fluctuation display of the effect design on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the effect design for controlling the effect design symbol to be stopped on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) Display control means (for example, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
The period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display is one effect period, and it is possible to change the display of the effect pattern in a certain effect period Has been
The symbol for effect that is variably displayed in a certain effect period can be temporarily stopped before being definitely displayed in a certain effect period, and temporarily displayed. In this case, it is possible to execute the pseudo-variation that is displayed again in a variable manner during the one production period, and when the symbol for the production is definitely or provisionally stopped, the definite or provisional stop is performed. At the time of display, it indicates that the special game is not executed, while the special stop display mode which indicates that the special game may be performed is definitely or provisionally displayed after the definite or temporary stop display. Is configured to be able to be displayed stopped on
The special stop is within one effect period corresponding to the period from the start of fluctuation display of the first identification information to the stop display, and within one effect period corresponding to the period from the start of fluctuation display of the second identification information to the stop display. It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the display aspect ratio is configured to be different from each other in a definite or temporary stop display ratio.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (7) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And an auxiliary game unit (for example, an auxiliary control board S) for controlling the effect display on the effect display unit;
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When random numbers are acquired by random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A, second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B), the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied The random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) which temporarily stores the acquired random number up to this point and controls so that the hold occurs.
If the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding a certain hold is satisfied, a yes / no judgment is performed based on the random number related to the certain hold, and the change display of the stop display mode of the identification information and the identification information based on the result of the yes / no judgment Game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining an aspect;
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the identification information after the
After the result of the success or failure judgment is won and the identification information is stopped and displayed, a special winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can be made advantageous for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
After the symbol for the first effect is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the control for causing the symbol for the first effect to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is controlled First effect design symbol display control means (for example, decoration symbol display control means SM21);
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect design is controlled to be stopped on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) And second effect design symbol display control means (eg, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
The period from the start of fluctuation display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one effect period, and it is possible to change and display both the symbol for the first effect and the symbol for the second effect within a certain effect period,
If there is a predetermined number of withdrawals at any one timing within a certain one rendering period, the symbol for the first performance variably displayed within the one one rendering period is within the one particular rendering period It is performed in the case where the variable display start condition of the identification information regarding any of the predetermined number of suspension is satisfied after the display is not fixedly stopped and the variable display is continuously continued even after the end within the certain one rendering period. While the symbol for the first effect that is being continuously changed and displayed being fixedly stopped within one effect period,
Even if there is a predetermined number of withdrawals at any one timing within a certain one rendering period, the second effect design symbol that is variably displayed within the one particular rendering period is within the one particular rendering period The pachinko gaming machine according to the present invention is configured to be stopped and displayed in a fixed manner.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (8) is
A starting opening where game balls can enter (for example, first main game starting opening A10, second main game starting opening B10),
Variable winning openings (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) capable of taking an open state and a closed state;
An identification information display section capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g, a second main game symbol display section B21g);
A main gaming unit (for example, a main control board M) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, effect display device SG) capable of displaying an effect;
And a sub game unit (for example, a sub control board S) that controls effect display on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG);
The main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition judgment execution means MJ 21-A for acquiring a random number based on entering a ball into the starting opening (for example, the first main game starting opening A10, the second main game starting opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
Game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that executes a yes-no decision based on the random number and determines the stop display mode of the identification information and the variation display mode of the identification information based on the result of the yes-no decision;
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN), the identification information is variably displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display portion A21g, the second main game symbol display portion B21g) Identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the identification information after the
After the result of the success or failure judgment is won and the identification information is stopped and displayed, a special winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can be made advantageous for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a game;
A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display performed on the side of the secondary gaming unit (for example, the secondary control board S) to the secondary gaming part (for example, the secondary control board S) Equipped with MT)
The secondary gaming unit (for example, secondary control board S),
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving the game information transmitted from the main gaming unit (for example, main control board M) side,
Effect display content control means (e.g., for example, control effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (e.g., effect display device SG) based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (e.g., information transmission / reception control means SM40) , Effect display control means SM20),
After the symbol for the first effect is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the control for causing the symbol for the first effect to be stopped and displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) is controlled First effect design symbol display control means (for example, decoration symbol display control means SM21);
After the second effect design is variably displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG), the second effect design is controlled to be stopped on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) And second effect design symbol display control means (eg, decorative symbol display control means SM21);
The period from the start of fluctuation display of identification information to the stop display is defined as one effect period, and it is possible to change and display both the symbol for the first effect and the symbol for the second effect within a certain effect period,
When the first effect design is stopped and displayed when there are multiple types of first effect designs, and the result of the judgment is a win, the combination of the first effect designs that are the same type is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the first effect design is stopped and displayed when the result of the judgment is non-winning, it is configured to stop and display the combination of the first effect design that is not the same type,
In the case of having a plurality of types of second effect symbols, and displaying the second effect symbols in a stopped state when the result of the judgment of success or failure is winning, a combination of the second effect symbols of the same type is displayed in a discontinuing manner On the other hand, when the second effect design symbol is stopped and displayed when the result of the judgment is non-winning, it is configured to stop and display the combination of the second effect symbol which is not the same type,
The combination of the second effect symbol that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the success / failure determination is non-winning than the total number of combinations of the first effect symbols that can be stopped and displayed when the result of the success / failure determination is non-winning It is configured to have fewer totals,
A plurality of effect display modes are provided as an effect display mode that depends on controlling the effect display content displayed by the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG),
When displaying a certain first effect design of the plurality of types of first effect design, the display attribute relating to the certain first effect design in a certain type of effect display mode, and the certain type The display attribute of the certain first effect design in a different kind of effect display mode is different from the effect display mode of
When displaying a certain second effect design of the plurality of types of second effect design, the display attribute related to the certain second effect design in a certain type of effect display mode, and the certain type It is configured to be different from the display attribute related to the certain second effect design in the effect display mode of a type different from the effect display mode of
If the result of the success or failure judgment is not won, the result of the success or failure judgment is not won more than the probability that the certain first effect design is included in the combination of the symbols for the first effect that can be stopped and displayed It is a pachinko game machine characterized in that the probability that the certain second effect design is included is higher in the combination of the second effect design that can be stopped and displayed in the case.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ 10 ball landing judgment means,
MJ11-A 1st main game start opening entrance ball judgment means MJ11-B 2nd main game start entrance entrance ball judgment means, MJ11-H auxiliary game entrance ball entrance entrance judgment means MJ11-C10 1st big prize entrance entrance ball judgment Means, MJ11-C20 2nd big winning a prize entrance sphere determination means MJ20 random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-A first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B second main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-H assistance Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 reserve control means, MJ31 reserve digestion control means MJ31 j variation start condition satisfaction determination means, MJ32 symbol reserve means MJ32-A first main game symbol reserve means, MJ32b-A first main game symbol reserve information Memory means MJ32-B second main game symbol holding means, MJ32b-B second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32-H auxiliary game pattern maintenance Means, MJ 32b-H auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MN game content determination means, MN 10 yes or no lottery means MN11-A first main game success or failure lottery means, MN11ta-A first main game success or failure lottery table MN11-B second Main game winning lottery means, MN11ta-B second main gaming winning lottery table MN11-H auxiliary game winning lottery means, MN11ta-H auxiliary gaming success lottery table MN20 special game transition determining means, MN40 symbol contents determining means MN41-A 1st main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A 1st main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B 2nd main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B 2nd main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H auxiliary game symbol determination Means, MN41ta-H Lottery table MN50 for auxiliary game symbol determination Change mode determination Stage, MN51-A 1st main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A 1st main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B 2nd main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B 2nd main game variation mode determination lottery Table, MN51-H auxiliary game fluctuation mode determination means MN51ta-H lottery table for auxiliary game fluctuation mode determination, MP game progression means MP10 display control means, MP11-C first and second main game symbol control means MP11 t-C first -Second main game symbol variation management timer, MP11-H auxiliary game symbol control means MP11t-H auxiliary game symbol variation management timer, MP20-B second main game start opening motorized opening and closing control means MP21-B second Main game start opening electric role thing opening and closing condition determination means, MP22t-B second main game start opening electric position open timer MP30 special game control hand , MP31 condition determination means MP32 special game content determination means, MP32 ta special game content reference table MP33 special game execution means, MP33-C first and second big winning opening electric role opening and closing control means MP33 c winning ball counter, MP34 special game time Management means MP34t special game timer, MP50 specific game control means MP51 probability variation end condition determination means, MP52 time short end condition determination means MP52c time short count counter, MB gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C first · second main game state temporary storage Means, MB11b-C first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means, MB11b-H auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b special game related information temporary storage means, MB30b specific game related Information temporary storage means MT Information transmission control hand MT10 buffer for command transmission, MH award ball payout determination means A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game start port A11s 1st main game start port entry ball detection device, A20 1st main game symbol display device A21g 1st Main game symbol display area, A21h 1st main game symbol hold display area B 2nd main game peripheral device, B10 2nd main game start port B11s 2nd main game start port entrance ball detection device, B11d 2nd main game start port electric motor Role B20 second main game symbol display device, B21 g second main game symbol display area B21 h second main game symbol hold display area, C 1st · 2nd main game common peripheral device C10 1st big winning opening, C11s 1st Large winning opening winning combination detection device C11d first large winning opening electric combination, C20 second large winning opening C21s second large winning opening winning combination detection device, C21 d second large winning opening electric combination H auxiliary game peripheral equipment, H10 Auxiliary game starting opening H11s auxiliary game starting opening ball entrance detection device, H20 auxiliary game pattern display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h auxiliary game symbol reservation display unit S sub-control board, SM effect display control unit (sub-main control board)
SM10 Display information receiving means, SM11b Main side information temporary storage means SM20 Effect display control means, SM21 Decorative symbol display control means SM21n Dressing display content determining means, SM21ta Drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta-2 Decorative symbol production table, SM21b drawing related information temporary storage means SM21t-1 first drawing fluctuation time management timer, SM22 drawing hold information display control means,
SM22b drawing reserve information temporary storage means, SM23 background effect display control means SM23n background effect display content determination means, SM23b background effect related information temporary storage means SM24 advance effect display control means, SM24n advance effect display content determination means SM24b advance effect related information Temporary storage means, SM25 reach effect display control means SM25n reach effect display content determination means, SM25b reach effect related information temporary storage means SM27 right-handed display control means SM40 information transmission / reception control means SS effect display means (sub-sub control unit), SS10 sub information Transmission / reception control means SS20 Image display control means, SS21b Image display related information temporary storage means SG Effect display device, SG10 Display area SG11 Decorative symbol display area, SG12 1st hold display section SG13 2nd hold display section KH Prize ball payout control basis Board KE award ball dispenser

Claims (1)

A first starting opening disposed at a position where entering the ball is easier than the gaming ball flowing down the second area side, the gaming ball flowing down the first area side,
A second starting opening disposed at a position where the game ball flowing down the second area side can enter the balls;
Variable winning opening that can take open and closed states,
A first identification information display unit capable of displaying first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying second identification information;
A main gaming unit that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit capable of displaying an effect;
With the sub game unit that controls the effect display on the effect display unit
Equipped with
The main game club is
First random number acquiring means for acquiring a first random number based on entering the first starting opening;
First random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired first random number as a first hold until the first random number acquisition means acquires the first random number, until the first success or failure determination permission condition is satisfied;
If the first pass / fail judgment permission condition regarding a certain first hold is satisfied, the pass / fail judgment is executed based on the first random number related to the certain first hold, and the stop display mode of the first identification information based on the result of the pass / fail judgment First game content determination means for determining the variation display mode of the first identification information;
First identification information display control means for controlling the first identification information to be stopped and displayed after the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display unit according to the determination by the first game content determination means;
Second random number acquiring means for acquiring a second random number based on entering the second starting opening;
Second random number temporary storage means for temporarily storing the acquired second random number as a second hold until the second random number acquisition means acquires the second random number, until the second yes / no determination permission condition is satisfied;
If the second yes / no decision permission condition regarding a certain second hold is satisfied, a yes / no decision is performed based on the second random number pertaining to the certain second hold, and the stop display mode of the second identification information based on the result of the relevant yes / no decision Second game content determination means for determining the variation display mode of the second identification information;
Second identification information display control means for controlling the second identification information to be stopped and displayed after the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display unit according to the determination by the second game content determination means;
After the result of the pass / fail judgment based on the first random number is won and the first identification information is stopped and displayed, or after the result of the pass / fail judgment based on the second random number is won and the second identification information is stopped and displayed Special game control means capable of executing a special game which can make the variable winning opening advantageous to the player;
As a gaming state during non-execution of the special game, there is a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state where it is easier to enter the second starting opening than the normal gaming state, and after the execution of the special game is over the specific gaming state Game state transition control means that can be controlled
Game information transmitting means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the secondary gaming unit to the side of the secondary gaming unit
The first identification information is not displayed while the second identification information is not displayed while the first identification information is displayed in a variable state. ,
The secondary gaming unit is
Game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main game unit side;
Effect display content control means for controlling the effect display contents to be displayed on the effect display unit based on the game information received by the game information receiving means;
First effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the first effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display portion after the first effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display portion;
Second effect symbol display control means for controlling the final display mode of the second effect symbol to be displayed on the effect display unit after the second effect symbol is variably displayed on the effect display unit
Equipped with
Within the period from the variable display start of the first identification information to the stop display or in the period from the variable display start of the second identification information to the stop display, it is possible to display variable for the first effect and the second effect Is configured as
When the first identification information is variably displayed in a certain variation display mode, a variation display of a first effect design corresponding to the certain variation display mode and a second performance symbol corresponding to the certain variation display mode Is configured to be able to execute variable
When the second identification information is variably displayed in a certain variation display mode, the variation display of the first effect design corresponding to the certain variation display mode and the second effect design corresponding to the certain variation display mode Is configured to be able to execute variable
When the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the symbol,
When the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a certain stop display mode, the final display mode of the first effect design corresponding to the certain stop display mode and the second effect corresponding to the certain stop display mode It is configured to be able to display the final display mode of the symbol,
A launch notification effect can be displayed on the effect display unit to notify the second area to prompt the game ball to be launched, and the launch notification effect is not displayed under the normal gaming state, but the launch notification effect is Is configured to be able to be displayed under circumstances where it is in a specific gaming state,
It is possible to simultaneously display all of the symbol for the first effect, the symbol for the second effect, and the emission notification effect,
A specific preview effect can be displayed on the effect display unit,
In the effect display unit, the emission notification effect is displayed at a position where it can overlap with the first effect design in the variable display, and the specific advance notice effect overlaps with the first effect design in the variable display. It is configured to be displayed at the obtained position,
In the effect display unit, the emission notification effect is displayed at a position not overlapping with the second effect design in the change display, while the specific advance notice effect overlaps with the second effect design in the change display. It is configured to be displayed at the obtained position,
It is possible to display the number of first holding images corresponding to the number of remaining first holdings in the first holding image display area in the effect display unit,
It is possible to display the number of second holding images corresponding to the number of remaining second holdings in the second holding image display area in the effect display unit,
The first hold number, which is the remaining hold number of the first hold, can be displayed in the first hold number display area in the effect display unit,
The second hold number, which is the remaining hold number of the second hold, can be displayed in the second hold number display area in the effect display unit,
A plurality of effect display formats are provided, and any one of the plurality of effect display formats can be displayed by the effect display unit, and when the effect display content is displayed, the effect display format is displayed. Are configured to be able to display
When the first effect display format of the plurality of types of effect display formats is displayed, the first reserved image is displayed in the first reserved image display area, but of the plurality of types of effect display formats When the second effect display format is displayed, while the first hold image is not displayed, the plurality of effect displays even if the first effect display format of the plurality of effect display formats is displayed. A pachinko gaming machine, wherein the first hold number is displayed in the first hold number display area even if the second effect display form of the form is displayed .

Images